Table of Contents
- VideoStudio 2021
- Contents
- Quick start
- Welcome
- Learning resources
- Workspace tour
- Capture and import
- Project basics
- Creating new projects and opening projects
- Setting project properties
- Creating custom profiles
- Using Smart Proxy for a faster, smoother editing experience
- Previewing your project or clips
- Undoing and redoing actions
- Showing and hiding grid lines
- Saving projects
- Saving projects by using Smart Package
- Adding cues and chapters
- Templates
- Organize and find media
- Timeline
- Edit media
- Using the Options panel in the Edit workspace
- Converting multiple files
- Adding video clips
- Adding photos
- Moving clips in the Timeline
- Rotate a video or photo
- Crop a video or photo
- Resizing/scaling a video or photo
- Time remapping
- Modifying video playback speed
- Using Freeze Frame
- Replacing media clips
- Trimming a clip
- Using Slip, Slide, Roll, or Stretch tools on the Timeline
- Using Split by Scene
- Trimming video into multiple clips
- Saving trimmed clips
- Taking a snapshot from a video clip
- Lens Correction
- Pan and zoom for video and photos
- Working with the Mask Creator (Ultimate)
- Track transparency
- 360 video
- Audio
- Adding audio files
- Using Audio Ducking to automatically adjust volume
- Splitting an audio track from a video clip
- Using Auto Music
- Balancing the volume of multiple clips with Normalize Audio
- Adjusting clip volume
- Trimming and cutting audio clips
- Stretching audio duration
- Applying fade-in/out
- Using the Sound Mixer
- Adjusting stereo channels
- Using the Surround Sound Mixer
- Mixing Surround Sound
- Duplicating an audio channel
- Applying audio filters
- Titles and subtitles
- 3D Title Editor
- Transitions
- Graphics
- Video filters
- Overlay clips
- Adding clips to overlay tracks
- Adjusting overlay clips
- Combining Overlay clips to create an Ultra HD (4K) video
- Applying motion to an overlay clip
- Adjusting the overall transparency of overlay clips
- Adding borders to overlay clips
- Using Chroma Key for a green screen effect
- Blending overlay clips with the background
- Adding a mask frame
- Using video masks with overlay clips
- Color correction and color grading
- Motion tracking
- Tracking paths
- Painting Creator
- FastFlick
- Creating a FastFlick project
- Selecting a template (FastFlick)
- Adding media clips (FastFlick)
- Editing titles (FastFlick)
- Adding music (FastFlick)
- Applying Pan & Zoom effects (FastFlick)
- Setting movie duration (FastFlick)
- Saving to video files for computer playback (FastFlick)
- Uploading to the Web (FastFlick)
- Editing your movie in VideoStudio (FastFlick)
- Highlight Reel
- Making FastFlick templates
- Stop motion animation
- Multi-Camera editing
- The Multi-Camera Editor workspace
- Basic steps in multi-camera editing
- Importing video and audio clips into the Multi-Camera Editor
- Synchronizing video and audio clips in multi-camera projects
- Choosing an audio source for your multi-camera project
- Editing multiple clips to create a multi-camera compilation
- Adding picture-in-picture (PIP) in the Multi-Camera Editor
- Managing multi-camera source files
- Saving and exporting your multi-camera project
- Using Smart Proxy with the Multi-Camera Editor
- Save and share
- Choosing a sharing option
- Saving to video files for computer playback
- Saving to video files for mobile devices
- Saving a track as an alpha channel video
- Saving HTML5 video files
- Uploading to the Web
- Creating 3D video files
- Creating video files from part of a project (trimmed)
- Creating sound files
- Working with custom profiles in the Share workspace
- Burn discs
- Shortcuts
- DV-to-DVD Wizard
Corel VideoStudio Pro 2021 User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for VideoStudio Pro 2021 by Corel which is a product in the Video Software category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Corel® VideoStudio® 2021
User Guide
Including VideoStudio Pro and VideoStudio Ultimate
Contents
Contents i
Quick start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
What’s new in Corel VideoStudio 2021? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Supported file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Hardware acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Preparing for video editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Installing and uninstalling the application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Starting and quitting the application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Updating the application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Corel Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
About Corel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Learning resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Documentation conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Using the Help system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Corel VideoStudio 2021 User Guide PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Learning with video tutorials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using Web-based resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Workspace tour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Exploring the workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Switching between workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
The Welcome book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using the Player panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using the toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Customizing the workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Changing the application language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Capture and import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Using the Options panel in the Capture workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
ii Corel VideoStudio
Capturing videos and photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Capturing digital video (DV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Using DV Quick Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Capturing analog video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Importing from digital media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Scanning and splitting scenes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Project basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Creating new projects and opening projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Setting project properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Creating custom profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using Smart Proxy for a faster, smoother editing experience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Previewing your project or clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Undoing and redoing actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Showing and hiding grid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Saving projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Saving projects by using Smart Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Adding cues and chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Using Instant Project templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Split screen video templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Organize and find media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Using the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Sorting, viewing, and filtering clips in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Searching the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Resizing thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Tagging files as 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Switching between Timeline views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Showing and hiding tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Adding and swapping tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Contents iii
Renaming tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Adjusting track height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Grouping and ungrouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using Ripple Editing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using Replace Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Edit media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using the Options panel in the Edit workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Converting multiple files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Adding video clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adding photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Moving clips in the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rotate a video or photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Crop a video or photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Resizing/scaling a video or photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Time remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Modifying video playback speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using Freeze Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Replacing media clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Trimming a clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Using Slip, Slide, Roll, or Stretch tools on the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Using Split by Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Trimming video into multiple clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Saving trimmed clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Taking a snapshot from a video clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Lens Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Pan and zoom for video and photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Working with the Mask Creator (Ultimate). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Track transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
360 video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Editing 360 video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Converting 360 video to standard video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
iv Corel VideoStudio
Tiny planet and rabbit hole effects from 360 video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Adding audio files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Using Audio Ducking to automatically adjust volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Splitting an audio track from a video clip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using Auto Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Balancing the volume of multiple clips with Normalize Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Adjusting clip volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Trimming and cutting audio clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Stretching audio duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Applying fade-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Using the Sound Mixer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adjusting stereo channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Using the Surround Sound Mixer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Mixing Surround Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Duplicating an audio channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Applying audio filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Titles and subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Adding titles using the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Adding titles with the Subtitle Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Formatting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Creating titles for the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Applying text effects and animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Converting titles to image and animation files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3D Title Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3D Title Editor workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Creating and editing 3D titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Adding transitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Saving and deleting transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Contents v
Morph Transitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Seamless Transitions (Ultimate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Adding color clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Adding color patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Adding backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Adding objects or frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Adding animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Video filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Applying filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Applying multiple filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Removing filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Marking filters as favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Customizing filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
AR Stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Overlay clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Adding clips to overlay tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Adjusting overlay clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Combining Overlay clips to create an Ultra HD (4K) video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Applying motion to an overlay clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Adjusting the overall transparency of overlay clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Adding borders to overlay clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Using Chroma Key for a green screen effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Blending overlay clips with the background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adding a mask frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Using video masks with overlay clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Color correction and color grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Using the Color controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Basic color and tone correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Adjusting white balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
vi Corel VideoStudio
Tone Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
HSL Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Color Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Video scopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Color grading with lookup tables (LUT profiles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Motion tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Tracking motion of video objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Matching motion to a tracking path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Customizing motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Tracking paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Adjusting tracking paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Using objects on tracking paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Using the Path Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Painting Creator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Working with Painting Creator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Painting Creator workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Switching between Painting Creator modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Choosing a background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
How to create animations and images in Painting Creator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Setting Painting Creator preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Creating and importing custom brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Exporting Painting Creator animations and images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
FastFlick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Creating a FastFlick project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Selecting a template (FastFlick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Adding media clips (FastFlick). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Editing titles (FastFlick). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Adding music (FastFlick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Applying Pan & Zoom effects (FastFlick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting movie duration (FastFlick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Contents vii
Saving to video files for computer playback (FastFlick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Uploading to the Web (FastFlick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Editing your movie in VideoStudio (FastFlick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Highlight Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Introduction to Highlight Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Highlight Reel window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Highlight Reel settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
How to create a Highlight Reel movie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Editing a Highlight Reel movie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Using face detection in Highlight Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Making FastFlick templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Terminology for FastFlick templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Rules for creating FastFlick templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Creating FastFlick templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Stop motion animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
How to create a stop motion project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Stop motion settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Opening and importing files for stop motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Using the DSLR Enlarge Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Multi-Camera editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
The Multi-Camera Editor workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Basic steps in multi-camera editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Importing video and audio clips into the Multi-Camera Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Synchronizing video and audio clips in multi-camera projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Choosing an audio source for your multi-camera project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Editing multiple clips to create a multi-camera compilation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Adding picture-in-picture (PIP) in the Multi-Camera Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Managing multi-camera source files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Saving and exporting your multi-camera project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Using Smart Proxy with the Multi-Camera Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
viii Corel VideoStudio
Save and share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Choosing a sharing option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Saving to video files for computer playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Saving to video files for mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Saving a track as an alpha channel video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Saving HTML5 video files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Uploading to the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Creating 3D video files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Creating video files from part of a project (trimmed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Creating sound files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Working with custom profiles in the Share workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Burn discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Saving a project to disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Assembling files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Adding and editing chapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Editing a menu template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Creating advanced menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Previewing your movie and menu before burning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Burning your project onto a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Copying a disc image file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Creating disc labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Menu command shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Workspace shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Navigation area shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Timeline shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Multi-trim Video shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Layout settings shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Screen capture shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Other Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Contents ix
DV-to-DVD Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Scanning for scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Applying templates and burning to DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
xCorel VideoStudio
Quick start 1
Quick start
If you want to dive into Corel® VideoStudio® right away, this tutorial will walk you through
the key tasks.
In this tutorial, you’ll learn how to:
• Import video clips to the Library
• Add your clips and photos
• Review and trim your video clips
• Add titles
• Apply transitions
• Add music
• Save and share
The same basic steps can be applied to create a photo slideshow or any multimedia
presentation that includes photos, video clips, and music.
For a quick movie, try Highlight Reel or Corel® FastFlick®. For more information, see
“Highlight Reel” on page 207 and “FastFlick” on page 217.
For more details about starting movie projects, see “Project basics” on page 39.
Import video clips to the Library
Let’s start with the most common situation—the shoot is done and you’ve transferred your
video clips and photos from your camera to your computer. We can open VideoStudio, and
jump directly to the Edit workspace and the Library.
The Library is the source for all your media, including video clips, photos, and music. It also
houses templates, transitions, effects, and a variety of other media assets that you can use in
your projects.
2VideoStudio
1Click the Edit tab at the top of the application window to open the Edit workspace. The
Library panel appears in the upper right corner of the application.
2Create a folder for your project to keep all your videos together by clicking the Add a
new folder button .
3Type a name for the folder.
4At the top of the Library, click the Import Media Files button , select the video clips
and photos that you want to use, and click Open.
Note that the buttons at the top of the Library can be enabled and disabled to filter the
thumbnails by video, photos, and music. If you don’t see the media you expect to see, check
the state of these media buttons.
Add your clips and photos
Adding clips and photos to a video project is as easy as dragging thumbnails for the video
clips and photos that you want to use from the Library to the Timeline.
If you’re looking for a way to get polished results quickly, you can use an Instant Project
template. For more information, see “Using Instant Project templates” on page 49.
Quick start 3
Review and trim your video clips
The key to a successful video is to keep it short enough to hold your viewer’s interest. Let’s
review and trim the video clips.
1In the Edit workspace, click a video clip in the Timeline.
2In the Navigation area of the Player panel, click Clip, and click the Play button.
3After you review the clip, drag the orange Trim Marker from the original starting
position to the new starting position. The Scrubber moves to the selected frame and this
frame displays in the Preview Window.
1. Trim Marker (one on each end). 2. Scrubber.
4Now drag the second Trim Marker from the original end position to the new end
position.
5Click Play.
Note: Changes made to files imported into the Library do not affect the original files.
You can also trim video clips in the Timeline itself by dragging the end handles of a clip.
21
4VideoStudio
Want to edit a section in the middle? Try Multi-Trim Video. For more information, see
“Trimming video into multiple clips” on page 88.
Add titles
Now let’s add a title.
1In the Timeline, drag the Scrubber to the position you want.
2Click the Title button to the left of the Library thumbnails.
3You can type directly in the Preview Window, but the easiest way to get a professional-
looking title, is to drag one of the title thumbnails from the Library to the Title track in
the Timeline.
4You can drag the title to any position in the Title track and adjust the duration of the title
by dragging the end handles of the clip.
5To edit the title text, double-click the title clip in the Timeline, in the Preview Window,
select the text and type new text.
6The Options panel displays in the Library panel. On the Text Settings page of the
Options panel, use any of the controls to format your title text. For example, you can
align the text and change the font, size, and color.
Quick start 5
Apply transitions
You can add transitions between clips or between photos. Transitions can be used to fade in
or fade out or to dissolve one photo into the next. There are many transition options to
choose from.
1In the Library, click the Transition button .
2Click the Gallery drop-list at the top of the Library, and choose All if you want to see
what is available.
3Drag the thumbnail for the transition you want to the Timeline and place it between two
clips or photos.
If you want to apply the same transition between all clips and photos in the track, in the
Library, right-click the transition thumbnail, and choose Apply current effect to video
track. You will be warned about replacing any existing transitions.
Add music
You can add songs from your computer by dragging a music file from the Library to the
Music track. You can also use Auto Music to choose royalty-free music to your project.
1On the Timeline toolbar, click the Auto Music button .
2In the Auto Music area that displays in the Options panel, experiment with different
choices in the drop-lists and click Play selected Song to listen to the selection.
3To add your selection to the Timeline, click Add to Timeline.
4The music is added to the Music track, and as with other clips, you can drag it to a new
position in the Timeline and trim it by dragging the end handles.
5To fade the music at the end of your project, click the Fade-out button in the Auto
Music area.
Note that with any audio clips, or video clips that include sound, you can control the volume
of the clips. For more information about adjusting audio, see “Audio” on page 111.
6VideoStudio
Save and share
When you’re finished with your project, you can save it and share it in a variety of ways. For
this tutorial, we’ll upload it directly to the Web.
Before sharing, it’s important to save a version of your project to the native *.vsp format. This
will give you maximum flexibility if you choose to edit your project later or if you want to
output it to a different format.
1Click the Share tab to view the Share workspace.
2Click File > Save, choose a location from the Save in box, and type a name in the File
name box.
3To share your video on the Web, click the Web button , then click YouTube or Vimeo,
and click Log In to sign in to your account or to create an account. After you sign in and
approve the link between VideoStudio and the account, choose the settings you want for
your video upload and click Start.
Welcome 7
Welcome
Welcome to VideoStudio, the surprisingly creative video-editing software that lets you
produce impressive video projects, regardless of your skill level. VideoStudio provides a
complete set of tools for capturing, editing, and sharing your video, slideshow, and
multimedia projects.
The availability of features depends on the version of the software that you have. For
more information, please see www.videostudiopro.com/compare.
This section contains the following topics:
• What’s new in Corel VideoStudio 2021?
•System requirements
• Supported file formats
• Hardware acceleration
• Preparing for video editing
• Installing and uninstalling the application
• Starting and quitting the application
• Updating the application
• Corel Support Services
•About Corel
What’s new in Corel VideoStudio 2021?
New creative features as well as enhancements to favorite features means that you can
create stunning videos faster in VideoStudio. The key updates are listed below.
New! Instant Project templates
Save yourself time and energy by recreating popular video styles in minutes with new Instant
Project templates. Simply select a template, drag and drop your video, and you're ready for
export! You can reproduce popular viral clips, add themed video openers, turn portrait video
into landscape, replicate marketing promo templates, and so much more. For more
information, see “Using Instant Project templates” on page 49.
8VideoStudio
New! AR Stickers
Add instant fun and extra personality to your next project with new AR Stickers. These face
tracking stickers recognize and map to facial features. Import and apply silly character ears,
show-stopping eyes, larger than life sunglasses, or over-the-top hats to any project. Adding
AR Stickers is the perfect way to emphasize reactions and add flavor to gaming videos,
reaction videos, and tutorials. For more information, see “AR Stickers” on page 151.
Enhanced! Premium Effects, Exclusive to Ultimate
Ultimate users can enjoy access to an expanded collection of industry-leading premium
effects from NewBlueFX and proDAD. Achieve remarkable creative transformations, add
interest with 3D titles, and set the mood in any scene. Enjoy optimized effects packs from
NewBlueFX and more than 100 new VitaScene effects from proDAD. Make real-time
corrections to shaky hand-held footage with the enhanced proDAD Mercalli video
stabilization tool. Easily fix imperfections, apply lens corrections, enhance and calibrate color,
create reflections, and so much more.
Enhanced! Customize Motion
Leverage enhanced Customize Motion tools for more polished motion effects. New Auto
Motion Blur calculates the size, position, and rotation of changes between two keyframes to
apply the optimal level of blur effect to make your motion look more natural. Ease in and out
of object animation seamlessly. Explore an enhanced project preview to see how your
animation looks with other timeline clips. Enjoy the convenience of multi-item editing to
work with grouped clips and titles, and easily switch between objects. For more information,
see “Customizing motion” on page 186.
Enhanced! Mask Creator (Ultimate)
Video masking is a powerful tool designed for everything from basic fixes to creative
enhancements. VideoStudio Ultimate 2021 expands the creative possibilities of the Mask
Creator with new keyframe controls that empower you to quickly and efficiently adjust the
position, size, and angles of your video masks. Jump right into the Mask Creator, without
selecting any clips, to create windows in your project and achieve cinema-quality special
effects and transitions! Create custom masks to remove objects from footage and target
edits to specific areas in your clips. For more information, see “Working with the Mask
Creator (Ultimate)” on page 95.
Enhanced! Split Screen template editor (Ultimate)
VideoStudio Ultimate 2021 delivers enhanced tools to help you work smarter across split
screen projects. Control objects more easily in the enhanced Split Screen Template Editor,
by leveraging new options to zoom in and out of the preview window. No need to re-work
your customizations—save time by quickly copying and pasting keyframe edits. With new
Welcome 9
Replace Mode, you can drag and drop your personal clips to swap out generic placeholders,
simply and efficiently. For more information, see “Split screen video templates” on page 51.
Enhanced! Usability
Enjoy more intuitive editing from import to export with usability improvements. Easily drag
and drop video to replace generic placeholder clips and create projects more efficiently.
Adjust color with the new Color Picker that introduces novel palettes to get to preferred
tones more quickly. The new Replace Mode lets you drag and drop footage to Instant Project
templates or Split Screen videos with ease.
Enhanced! Performance
Work faster with an optimized editing workflow and enjoy major performance improvements
made across the product. VideoStudio Ultimate 2021 is optimized for AMD and nVidia, which
dramatically improves project previewing and speeds up your workflow when using popular
file formats. Edit efficiently with smaller proxy files that speed up project previewing while
preserving your original high resolution file quality for export. Get the reliable performance
and stability you need in VideoStudio 2021.
System requirements
For optimal performance of VideoStudio, make sure that your system meets the
recommended specifications. Note that some formats and features require specific hardware
or software (as indicated).
• Internet connection required for installation, registration and updates. Registration
required for product use. Digital download option available if optical drive is not
available for installation.
•Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7, 64-bit OS
• Intel Core i3 or AMD A4 3.0 GHz or higher
• Intel Core i5 or i7 1.06 GHz or higher required for AVCHD & Intel Quick Sync Video
support
• Intel Core i7 or AMD Athlon A10 or higher for UHD, Multi-Camera or 360° video
• 4 GB of RAM or higher, 8+GB highly recommended for UHD, Multi-Camera, or 360°
video
• Graphics card with minimum of 256 MB VRAM, 512 MB or higher recommended for
hardware decoding acceleration
• HEVC (H.265) support requires Windows 10, supporting PC hardware or graphics card
and Microsoft HEVC video extension installed
• Minimum display resolution: 1024 x 768
•Windows-compatible sound card
• Minimum 8 GB hard drive space for full installation
10 VideoStudio
Accessories
• DVD burner for creating DVD and AVCHD discs
Input Options
• Capture from DV, HDV and Digital8 camcorders or VCRs (requires a FireWire port)
• Capture from analog camcorders with compatible analog capture card
•Capture from USB capture devices, PC cameras, webcams
• Import from AVCHD and other file-based camcorders, digital still cameras, mobile
devices and discs
Product specifications are subject to change without notice or obligation.
For more details, visit: www.videostudiopro.com
Supported file formats
The supported file formats are listed below. Please review release notes for any updates to
supported files or visit www.videostudiopro.com for the latest list in the system requirements
section.
Import Formats
•Video: AVCHD* (.M2T/.MTS), AVI, DV, DVR-MS, HDV, HEVC** (H.265), M2TS, M4V, MKV,
MOD, MOV*** (H.264), MPEG-1/-2/-4, MXF, TOD, UIS, UISX, WebM, WMV, XAVC, XAVC S,
3GP, Non-encrypted DVD titles
•360 Video: Equirectangular, Single Fisheye, Dual Fisheye
•Audio: AAC, Aiff, AMR, AU, CDA, M4A, MOV, MP2, MP3, MP4, MPA, OGG, WAV, WMA
•Image: CLP, CUR, DCX, EPS, GIF87a, ICO, IFF, IMG, JP2, JPC, JPG, MAC, MPO, MSP, PBM,
PCT, PCX, PGM, PNG, PPM, PSD, PSPImage, PXR, RAS, SCT, TGA, TIF/TIFF, UFO, WBM,
WBMP, WMF, Camera RAW
Export Formats
•Video: AVC, AVI, DV, HDV, HEVC** (H.265), M2T, MOV, MPEG-1/-2/-4, UIS, UISX, WebM,
WMV, XAVC S, 3GP
•Devices: Apple iPod/iPhone/iPad/TV, Android devices, Sony PSP/PS3/PS4, Nintendo Wii,
Microsoft Xbox compatible formats, DV, HDV
•Disc: DVD, AVCHD, SD Card, Blu-ray (see below)
•Web: YouTube, Vimeo
•Audio: M4A, OGG, WAV, WMA
Welcome 11
•Image: BMP, JPG
Blu-ray Support
• Requires purchase of a separate plug-in from within the product
• Requires Blu-ray Disc reader and/or burner
* AVCHD with AC3 audio is only supported on Windows 8 and 10
**HEVC (H.265) support requires Windows 10, supporting PC hardware or graphics card, and
Microsoft HEVC video extension installed
***Support to import and output Alpha Channel videos
Product specifications are subject to change without notice or obligation.
Hardware acceleration
Depending on your hardware specifications, VideoStudio lets you optimize the performance
of your system by optimizing hardware acceleration. For example, you can take advantage
of nVidia CUDA or Intel Quick Sync. Experiment with different settings to achieve optimal
results.
Hardware decoder and encoder acceleration requires at least 512 MB of VRAM.
To change hardware acceleration settings
1Select Settings > Preferences [F6].
2Click the Performance tab and select the following options under Hardware
acceleration:
• Enable Hardware Decoder acceleration — enhances editing performance and
improves clip and project playback by using video graphics acceleration technologies
of the computer’s available hardware
• Enable Hardware Encoder acceleration — improves the rendering time required for
producing your movies. From the Type drop-list, choose an option.
If the feature is not supported by your system, some hardware acceleration options will
be grayed out.
12 VideoStudio
Preparing for video editing
Video editing tasks require a lot of computer resources. Your computer must be properly set
up to ensure successful capturing and smooth video editing. Below are some tips on how to
prepare and optimize your computer before you launch VideoStudio.
• It is recommended that you close other applications when working with VideoStudio. To
avoid interruptions while capturing, it is best to turn off any automatically launched
software.
• If you have two hard drives in your system, it is recommended that you install
VideoStudio to your system drive (usually C:) and store captured videos on your other
drive.
• It is recommended that you store video files on a dedicated hard drive.
• Increase the Paging File (Swap File) size to twice your amount of RAM.
When you are in VideoStudio, you can choose settings that let you balance the quality of the
playback and the speed of the application. For example, is your playback fast but fuzzy? Or
is your playback too slow? The tips below can help you find the right settings in VideoStudio.
• Clearer, higher quality playback is available if your computer system meets or exceeds
the recommended system requirements. You can work with HD projects and you can
preview your project in HD. For more information, see “Setting project properties” on
page 40 and “Previewing your project or clips” on page 43.
• To speed up less powerful systems, consider using Smart Proxy and review the hardware
acceleration options. For more information, see “Using Smart Proxy for a faster,
smoother editing experience” on page 42 and “Hardware acceleration” on page 11.
Installing and uninstalling the application
You can install VideoStudio from a disc or from installation files that you download.
To install VideoStudio
1Close any open applications.
2Double-click the associated .exe file that you downloaded or insert the DVD in the DVD
drive.
If the disc-initiated setup does not start automatically, navigate to the DVD drive on your
computer, and double-click Setup.exe.
3Follow the instructions on your screen.
Note: In addition to VideoStudio, you might be prompted to install supporting
Windows extensions and third-party programs and drivers.
Welcome 13
To uninstall VideoStudio
1Open the Windows Control Panel.
2In the Programs category, click the Uninstall a program link.
3In the Programs and Features window, click Corel VideoStudio 2021 in the list of
applications.
4Click Uninstall/Change.
5Follow the instructions on your screen.
Starting and quitting the application
You can start VideoStudio from the Windows desktop or Start menu, and quit the program
from the application window.
To start the application
• From the Windows Start menu or Start screen, choose Corel VideoStudio 2021.
To quit the application
• Do one of the following:
• Choose File > Exit.
• Click the Close button in the upper-right corner of the application window.
Updating the application
You can check for and install product updates. Updates provide important new information
about your application.
To update the application
•Choose Help > Check for Updates.
Corel Support Services
Corel® Support Services can provide you with prompt and accurate information about
product features, specifications, pricing, availability, services, and technical support options.
For the most current information on available support and professional services for your
Corel product, please visit www.corel.com/support.
14 VideoStudio
About Corel
Corel products enable millions of connected knowledge workers around the world to do
great work faster. Offering some of the industry's best-known software brands, we give
individuals and teams the power to create, collaborate, and deliver impressive results. Our
success is driven by an unwavering commitment to deliver a broad portfolio of innovative
applications – including CorelDRAW®, MindManager®, Parallels®, and WinZip® – to
inspire users and help them achieve their goals. To learn more about Corel, please visit
www.corel.com.
Learning resources 15
Learning resources
You can learn how to use VideoStudio in various ways: by searching the Help or the user
guide, by accessing video tutorials in the Welcome tab, or by exploring the Corel website
(www.corel.com).
This section contains the following topics:
• Documentation conventions
• Using the Help system
• Corel VideoStudio 2021 User Guide PDF
• Learning with video tutorials
• Using Web-based resources
Documentation conventions
The following table describes important conventions used in the Help.
Using the Help system
The Help that is available from within the program is the most comprehensive source of
information for VideoStudio. The Help system provides two ways to find information. You
Convention Description Example
Menu >Menu
command
A menu item followed by a menu
command
Click Settings > Preferences > Edit.
drop-list A list of options that drops down when
a user clicks a down arrow button
Select a profile from the Profile drop-
list.
A note containing information that is
important to the preceding steps. It
may describe conditions under which
the procedure can be performed.
Enable Flatten audio and
background video if your browser
can only support a single track for
audio and video.
A tip containing suggestions for
performing the preceding steps. It may
present alternatives to the steps, or
other benefits and uses of the
procedure.
For best results, use a tripod when
you shoot photos and videos that
you want to use in your stop motion
animation project.
16 VideoStudio
can choose a topic from the Contents pane, or use the Search box to search for specific
words and phrases. You can also print topics from the Help.
An Internet connection is required to view the Help. If you work offline on a regular basis,
you can download a PDF copy of the information (Help > User Guide (PDF)).
To use the Help system
1Do one of the following:
• Click Help > Help topics.
• Press F1.
2In the Help window, do one of the following:
• Contents pane (on left) — browse through topics in the Help
• Search box (along top of window) — search the full text of the Help for a particular
word or phrase (enclosed in quotation marks). For example, if you are looking for
information about a specific tool or command, you can type the name of the tool or
command, such as Trimming, to display a list of relevant topics.
Corel VideoStudio 2021 User Guide PDF
You can view the Corel VideoStudio 2021 User Guide PDF online or you can download it
to your computer or tablet. At any time, you can print the pages you want. You can find the
PDF in Help menu (Help > User Guide (PDF)).
Learning with video tutorials
The Welcome tab includes access to learning material, such as video tutorials (English only
for some video content), as well as free and paid content to help you expand your project
options in VideoStudio.
The Welcome book is accessed from the Welcome tab. Click Tutorials to explore the
collection of video tutorials. For more information, see “The Welcome book” on page 23.
You can also visit www.youtube.com/VideoStudioPro for more tutorials.
To open the Discovery Center window
•Choose Help Video Tutorials.
Learning resources 17
Using Web-based resources
From the VideoStudio Help menu and the Corel website, you can access a number of Web
pages dedicated to customer support and communities. You can find resources such as
tutorials, tips, newsgroups, downloads, and other online resources.
To access Corel VideoStudio Web resources
• Use your Internet browser to go to www.videostudiopro.com/learn for tutorials,
community forums, and other resources
• Visit VideoStudio Facebook postings: https://www.facebook.com/corelvideostudio
18 VideoStudio
Workspace tour 19
Workspace tour
VideoStudio has three workspaces: Capture, Edit, and Share. These workspaces are based on
the key steps in the video-editing process. The customizable workspaces let you rearrange
the panels to suit your preferences and ensure that you have everything you need at a
glance.
This section presents the following topics:
• Exploring the workspaces
• Switching between workspaces
• The Welcome book
• Using the Player panel
• Using the toolbar
• Customizing the workspace
• Changing the application language
Exploring the workspaces
Corel VideoStudio Pro consists of three main workspaces, and a Welcome tab.
•Capture
•Edit
• Share
Each workspace contains specific tools and controls to help you accomplish the task at hand
quickly and efficiently.
For more information about the Welcome tab, see “The Welcome book” on page 23.
You can customize the size and position of the elements on your screen for full control of
your editing environment. For information about using a custom workspace layout, see
“Customizing the workspace” on page 28.
The Capture workspace
Media clips can be recorded or imported directly to your computer's hard drive. This step
allows you to capture and import video, photo, and audio clips.
20 VideoStudio
The Capture workspace consists of the following components:
1. Menu bar — provides various commands for customizing VideoStudio, opening and
saving movie projects, working with individual clips, and more.
2. Preview Window — shows the current video being played in the Player panel.
3. Library panel — a storage depot for captured media clips.
4. Navigation area — provides buttons for playback and for precision trimming in the Player
panel.
5. Information panel — lets you view information about the files you are working with.
6. Capture Options — displays different media capture and import methods.
The Edit workspace
When you open Corel VideoStudio Pro, the Edit workspace appears as your default
workspace. The Edit workspace and the Timeline are the heart of Corel VideoStudio Pro,
where you can arrange, edit, trim, and add effects to your video clips.
12 3
456
Workspace tour 21
The Edit workspace consists of the following components:
1. Menu bar — provides various commands for customizing VideoStudio, opening and
saving movie projects, working with individual clips, and more.
2. Player panel — shows the current video being played in the Preview Window and lets
you edit objects interactively.
3. Library panel — a storage depot for everything you need to create a movie, including
sample video, photo, and music clips, and your imported clips. It also includes templates,
transitions, titles, graphics, filters, and paths. The Options panel shares space with the
Library panel.
4. Navigation area — provides buttons for playback and for precision trimming in the Player
panel.
5. Toolbar — lets you choose from a variety of functions related to content in the Timeline.
6. Timeline panel — The Timeline is where you assemble the media clips for your video
project. For more information, see “Timeline” on page 63.
The Share workspace
The Share workspace lets you save and share your finished movie.
123
46
5
22 VideoStudio
The Share workspace consists of the following components:
1. Menu bar — provides various commands for customizing VideoStudio, opening and
saving movie projects, working with individual clips, and more.
2. Preview Window — shows the current video being played in the Player panel.
3. Category selection area — lets you choose between Computer, Device, Web, Disc, and
3D movies output categories. For HTML5 projects, you can choose HTML5 and Corel
VideoStudio project.
4. Format area — provides a selection of file formats, profiles, and descriptions. For Web
sharing, it displays the settings for your account.
5. Navigation area — provides buttons for playback and for precision trimming in the Player
panel.
6. Information area — lets you view the information about the output location and provides
an estimate of the file size.
Switching between workspaces
VideoStudio simplifies the process of creating movies by organizing the controls you need
into three workspaces that correspond to the different steps in the video-editing process.
Capture Media clips can be recorded or imported directly to your
computer's hard drive in the Capture workspace. This workspace
allows you to capture and import video, photo, and audio clips.
12 3
56
4
Workspace tour 23
To switch between workspaces
• At the top of the application window, click one of the following tabs:
• Capture
• Edit
• Share
The Welcome book
The Welcome book is accessed from the Welcome tab.
In the Welcome book, you’ll find
• Video tutorials
• Content offerings (free and paid)
• Update information
• Information about other resources
Review the Welcome book regularly to see what’s new.
The Welcome book is set as the default tab when you open the application. You can adjust
your default startup page in Settings > Preferences, and on the General tab, choose a
Default startup page. Note that the Welcome book page might still display on startup if
important updates are available.
Using the Player panel
The Player panel consists of the Preview window and the Navigation area, which provides
buttons for playback and for precision trimming of clips. Use the controls in the Navigation
area to move around a selected clip or your project. Use the Trim Markers and Scrubber to
edit your clips. In the Capture workspace, this panel also acts as the device control for a DV
or HDV camcorder.
Edit The Edit workspace includes the Timeline. This is the heart of
VideoStudio, where you can arrange, edit, trim and add effects to
your video clips.
Share The Share workspace lets you save and share your movie. You can
save your video file, burn it to a disc, or upload it to the Web.
24 VideoStudio
The Player panel consists of the 1. Preview Window and the 2. Navigation area
The preview window in the Player panel is where you can interactively edit your project. The
type of edits depend on the content and tool that you select.
Smart guides
Smart guides are alignment lines that show automatically when you select and move objects
in the preview window. For example, if you move text in the preview window, Smart guides
help you identify the project center or edge, or the alignment relative to other objects.
Smart guides appear as red dashed lines to help you align the selected object in the
Preview window.
The Navigation area
The table below describes the controls available in the Navigation area.
Part Description
Scrubber Lets you scrub through the project or clip.
Trim Markers Lets you drag the scrubbers to set a preview
range in the project or to trim a clip.
Project/Clip mode Specifies a preview of the entire project or of a
selected clip.
1
2
Workspace tour 25
The Play button in the Navigation area serves two purposes: for playback of your entire
project or a selected clip.
To preview projects or clips
• Click Project or Clip, then click Play.
While working on your project, you will want to preview your work frequently to see how
your project is progressing. Instant Playback allows you to quickly preview changes in your
project. Playback quality will be dependent on your computer’s resources.
Play Plays, pauses, or resumes the current project or
a selected clip.
Home Returns to the starting segment or cue.
Previous Moves to the previous frame.
Next Moves to the next frame.
End Moves to the end segment or cue.
Repeat Loops playback.
System Volume Lets you adjust the volume of your computer's
speakers by dragging a slider.
HD Preview and 360
Preview drop-list
Lets you preview clips or projects in high
definition (HD) or 360 degree (360).
Change project
aspect ratio
Lets you change the aspect ratio (updates the
project settings).
Resize/Crop Lets you access Crop mode and Scale mode
(resize or distort).
Timecode Lets you jump directly to a part of your project
or selected clip by specifying the exact
timecode.
Enlarge Preview
Window
Increases the size of the Preview Window.
Split Clip Splits the selected clip. Position the Scrubber
to where you want the clip to be split, and then
click this button.
Mark-in and Mark-
out
Sets a preview range in the project, or sets the
start and end points for trimming a clip.
Part Description
26 VideoStudio
You may choose to play only a part of your project. The selected range of frames to
preview is referred to as the preview range, and it is marked as a colored bar in the
Ruler Panel.
To play the trimmed range only
1Use the Trim Markers or the Mark-in/out buttons to select the preview range.
2To preview the selected range, select what you want to preview (Project or Clip), then
click Play. To preview the entire clip, hold [Shift], then click Play.
Using the toolbar
The toolbar provides easy access to many editing commands. You can change your project
view, zoom in and out on the Timeline, and launch different tools that can help you edit
efficiently. You can customize the toolbar by showing or hiding tools.
Part Description
Storyboard View Displays your media thumbnails in chronological order.
Timeline View Lets you perform frame-accurate editing of your clips on
separate tracks, add and position other elements such as
titles, overlays, voice-over and music.
Replace Mode Lets you drag and drop clips from the Library to replace
clips on the Timeline. When not enabled, you must press
and hold the CTRL key to replace timeline clips with
Library clips.
Customize Toolbar Lets you hide or show individual toolbar tools.
Undo Undoes the last action.
Redo Repeats the last action that was undone.
Slip tool Lets you drag a trimmed clip in the Timeline to change
which frames show. Clip duration in the Timeline does not
change.
Stretch tool Lets you change the speed of the clip by interactively
stretching or compressing the clip in the Timeline.
Roll tool Lets you drag the out point/in point between two trimmed
clips in the Timeline, therefore adjusting the duration of the
two clips.
Slide tool Lets you adjust the end points for a trimmed clip in the
Timeline without affecting the duration of the adjacent
clips.
Workspace tour 27
Record/Capture
Option
Shows the Record/Capture Option panel, where you can
capture videos, import files, record voice-overs and take
snapshots.
Sound Mixer Launches the Surround Sound Mixer and the multitrack
Audio Timeline, which lets you customize your audio
settings.
Auto Music Launches the Auto Music Options Panel for adding
background music to your project in a variety of styles and
moods. You can set the music to match the duration of
your project.
Track Motion Launches the Track Motion dialog box, which lets you
create tracking paths of particular elements in selected
video clips.
Subtitle Editor Launches the Subtitle Editor dialog box, which lets you
detect and organize segments to easily add titles in
selected video clips.
Multi-Camera
Editor
Launches the Multi-Camera Editor and imports any of the
selected media.
Time Remapping Launches the Time Remapping dialog box, which lets you
use speed controls to slow down, speed up, reverse, or
freeze frames in a video clip.
Mask Creator Launches the Mask Creator dialog box, which lets you
create video and still masks.
Pan and Zoom Launches the Pan & Zoom dialog box, which lets you apply
pan and zoom effects using keyframes.
3D Title Editor Launches the 3D Title Editor dialog box, which lets you
create and save three-dimensional titles.
Split Screen
Template Creator
Launches the Template Editor where you can create or
edit split screen templates that let you play multiple
videos in a creative layout.
Painting Creator Launches Painting Creator where you can record painting,
drawing, or writing strokes as an animation or still image
that can be applied to your project as an overlay effect.
Zoom in and Zoom
out
Lets you adjust your view of the Timeline by using the
zoom slider and buttons.
Fit Project in
Timeline Window
Adjusts your project view to fit the entire span of your
Timeline.
Project Duration Shows the total duration of the project.
Part Description
28 VideoStudio
To hide or show tools on the Timeline toolbar
1In the Timeline, click the Customize Toolbar button .
2In the Customize Toolbar window, click the check boxes beside the tools to show (check
mark) or hide (no check mark) tools on the toolbar.
Customizing the workspace
The new workspace is designed to provide you with a better editing experience. You can now
customize the size of the program window and change the size and position of the elements
on your screen for full control of your editing environment.
Each panel behaves like an independent window that can be modified according to your
editing preferences. This is very useful when you are using large displays or dual monitors.
The main panels are:
1. Player panel — Contains the Preview Window and Navigation area.
2. Timeline panel — Contains the Toolbar and Timeline.
3. Library panel — Contains the media library and shares space with the Options panel.
To hide or show the Library and Options panel
• In the lower right corner of the Library panel, click one of the following buttons :
• Show Library panel
• Show Library and Options panel
• Show Options panel
To move a panel
• Double-click the top-left corner of the Player Panel, Timeline Panel or Library Panel.
When the panel is active, you can minimize, maximize, or resize each panel.
1
2
3
Workspace tour 29
You can also drag the panel outside the main application window into the second
display area for dual-monitor setups.
To customize the size of the program window
• You can do one of the following:
• Click the Restore button and drag the ends of the program window to the desired
size.
• Click the Maximize button for full screen editing.
To dock a panel
1Start to drag an undocked panel.
The docking guides appears.
2Drag the panel over a docking guide to choose a docking position and release the
mouse.
The panel snaps into place.
To save a custom workspace layout
• Click Settings > Layout Settings > Save to and click a Custom option.
To load a custom workspace layout
• Click Settings > Layout Settings > Switch to and choose Default or one of the custom
settings you have saved.
To know more about hotkey combinations assigned for each preset, see “Layout settings
shortcuts” on page 271.
You can also change the layout settings from the UI Layout tab in Settings >
Preferences.
30 VideoStudio
To set program preferences
• Click Settings > Preferences or press F6 to launch the Preferences dialog box.
Changing the application language
You can change the application language of VideoStudio.
Note: If the language does not display as expected after you make the change in
VideoStudio, check the following in Windows:
• Verify that the language you want to display is added in the Windows language settings
(Windows Control Panel > Clock, Language, and Region > Add a language).
• For non-Unicode text, change the system locale.
To change the display language
• Click Settings > Display Language, and choose the language you want from the
submenu.
Capture and import 31
Capture and import
VideoStudio lets you capture or import video from DVD-video, AVCHD and BDMV discs
including camcorders that record on memory cards, internal memory of discs, DV or HDV
camcorders, mobile devices, as well as analog and digital TV capture devices.
This section contains the following topics:
• Using the Options panel in the Capture workspace
• Capturing videos and photos
• Capturing digital video (DV)
•Using DV Quick Scan
• Capturing analog video
• Importing from digital media
• Scanning and splitting scenes
Using the Options panel in the Capture workspace
In the Capture workspace, VideoStudio displays the Library and the capture Options panel
where different media capture and import methods are available.
The table below discusses the options in the Capture workspace.
Click Capture Video to import video footage and photos from your camcorder
to your computer.
Click DV Quick Scan to scan your DV tape and select the scenes.
Click Import from Digital Media to add media clips from a DVD-Video,
AVCHD, BDMV formatted disc or from your hard drive. This feature also allows
you to import video directly from AVCHD, Blu-ray Disc or DVD camcorders.
Click Stop Motion to create instant stop motion animations using captured
images from your photos and video capture devices.
Click MultiCam Capture to create screen capture videos. You can also choose
to capture your webcam and your screen at the same time (MultiCam Capture
Lite version is limited to one camera device plus screen capture). Please see the
Help within MultiCam Capture Lite for more information.
32 VideoStudio
Capturing videos and photos
The steps on how to capture are similar for all types of camcorders except for the available
capture settings in the Capture Video Options panel that can be selected for each type of
source.
The Capture Video Options panel consists of the following components:
•Duration — Sets the length of time for the capture.
•Source — Displays the detected capture device and lists other capture devices installed
on your computer.
•Format — Gives you a list of options where you select a file format for saving your
captured video.
•File name — Allows you to specify a prefix for captured files.
•Capture folder — Allows you to specify a location for captured files.
•Split by scene — Automatically separates captured video into several files based on
changes in shooting date and time.
•Capture to library — Choose or create a Library folder where you want your video to
be saved.
•Options — Displays a menu allowing you to modify your capture settings.
•Capture Video — Transfers video from your source to your hard drive.
•Take a Snapshot — Captures the displayed video frame as a photo.
To capture video clips and photos from your camcorder
1Connect your camcorder to your computer and turn on the device. Set it to Play (or VTR
/ VCR) mode.
2In Capture Options Panel, click Capture Video.
3Select your capture device from the Source drop-list.
4Select a file format from the Format drop-list. In the Capture folder box, type a folder
location or mark the Capture to library check box and choose a folder from the drop-
list.
Note: Click Options to customize capture settings specific to your video device.
5Scan your video to search the part for capture.
Note: If you are capturing video from a DV or HDV camcorder, use the Navigation area
to play your video tape.
6Click Capture Video, when your video for capture is already on cue. Click Stop Capture
or press [Esc] to stop capturing.
7To capture a photo from the video footage, pause the video on the desired frame then
click Take a Snapshot.
Capture and import 33
Note: When your camcorder is in Record mode (usually named CAMERA or MOVIE),
you can capture live video.
Note: The available settings in the Video properties dialog box vary, depending on the
capture file format that you have chosen.
To capture videos and photos using a DSLR
1Connect your DSLR to your computer and turn on the device.
2Click Capture Video and select your device from the Source drop-list.
3Specify a folder location for your saved files by clicking the Capture Folder button .
4Click Capture Video to start recording. Click Stop Capture or press [Esc] to stop
capturing.
5To capture a photo while the DSLR is connected to the computer, click Take a snapshot.
To capture video from an HDV camcorder
1Connect your HDV camcorder to your computer’s IEEE-1394 port using the IEEE-1394
cable.
2Turn on your camcorder and switch it to Play/Edit mode and make sure that your HDV
camcorder is switched to HDV mode.
Note: For Sony HDV camcorders, flip open the LCD screen and see if HDVout I-Link is
on the LCD screen to check if the camera is set to HDV mode. If you see DVout I-Link,
press P-MENU at the lower right of the screen. In the menu, press MENU > STANDARD
SET > VCR HDV/DV and press HDV.
3In the Capture workspace, click Capture Video .
To capture DVB-T video
1In the Capture workspace, click Capture Video .
Note: Before capturing, ensure that the DVB-T source is connected via a compatible
capture card installed on your computer.
2Select Digital TV Source from the Source drop-list.
3Click Options and select Video Properties. The Video properties dialog box will
appear.
4In the Input Source tab, select TV from the Input source drop-list. Click OK.
5In Channel List, click Start Scan to start scanning for channels.
Note: DVB-T channels are not automatically scanned. Make sure to manually scan the
channels first before capturing.
6Click Capture Video.
34 VideoStudio
7Click Yes when prompted if you want to start capturing and automatically recovering
DVB-T video.
8Follow the remaining steps as described in the procedure for capturing videos.
To capture T V footage
1Select your TV tuner device from the Source drop-list.
2Click Options > Video Properties to open the Video properties dialog box. If needed,
adjust the settings accordingly.
Click the Tuner Information tab to choose Antenna or Cable, scan available channels in
your region, and more.
3In the Channel box, specify the channel number from which to capture.
To capture video in MPEG-2 format
1In Source, choose your video source.
2Specify or browse for the destination folder where you want your clips to be stored in
Capture folder.
3Click Options and select Video properties. In the dialog box that opens, select a profile
in the Current Profile drop-list.
4Click OK.
5Click Capture Video to start capturing and Stop Capture to end your capturing session.
Your media clip will be stored as MPEG-2 format in the folder you specified.
Capturing digital video (DV)
To capture Digital Video (DV) in its native format, select DV from the Format list in the
Options Panel. This saves the captured video as a DV AVI file (.avi).
You can also use the DV Quick Scan option to capture DV video DV AVI Type-1 and
Type-2.
When capturing DV, click Options in the Options Panel and select Video properties to open
a menu. In the Current Profile, choose whether to capture DV as DV Type-1 or DV Type-2.
Using DV Quick Scan
Use this option to scan a DV device for scenes to import. You can add the date and time of
your video.
For more information on this feature, see “DV-to-DVD Wizard” on page 273.
Capture and import 35
To add the date and time of your video
1 After scanning your DV tape, click Next.
This will then display the Import Settings dialog box.
2Select Insert to Timeline and choose Add video date information as title.
Note: If you want the shooting date to appear for the duration of the video, select
Entire video. If you only want a portion of the video, select Duration and specify the
number of seconds.
Capturing analog video
When footage is captured from analog sources such as VHS, S-VHS, Video-8, or Hi8
camcorders/VCRs, it is converted to a digital format that can be read and stored by the
computer. Before capturing, choose the desired file format to use for saving the captured
video in the Options Panel’s Format list.
To specify the type of video source you are capturing from
1In the Capture workspace, click Options and select Video properties.
2In the dialog box that opens, you can customize the following capture settings:
• In the Input Source tab, choose whether you are capturing NTSC, PAL, or SECAM video
and select the Input source (TV, Composite, or S-Video).
• In the Color Manager tab, you can fine tune the video source to ensure good quality
captures.
• In the Template tab, choose the frame size and compression method to use for saving
the captured video.
Importing from digital media
You can import DVD, AVCHD, BDMV video and photos from a disc, hard drive, memory card
and digital camcorders.
To import digital media
1In the Capture workspace, click Import from Digital Media.
2Click Select Import Source Folders and browse for folders that contain your digital
media and click OK.
3Click Start and the Import from Digital Media dialog box appears.
36 VideoStudio
4Choose the media clips you want to import and click Start import. All imported videos
will be added to the thumbnail list in the Library.
To enable timecode retrieval for AVCHD
1In the Capture workspace, click Import from Digital Media.
2Select the file location from the Select Import Source Folders list and click Start.
3Choose the media clips you want to import and click Start import to launch Import
Settings.
4In Import Destination, select Insert to Timeline or select Add video date information
as title.
5Choose Entire video to import the timecode of the video file as a title spanning the
entire duration of the video. Choose Duration to import the timecode as a title within a
specified duration. Click OK to apply the settings.
Note: You can apply the same settings to all the videos that you import and hide the
Import Settings dialog box by marking the Apply this setting and never ask me again
check box. You can also choose to enable the same check box on the Capture tab of the
Program preferences dialog box. For more information, see “Customizing the
workspace” on page 28.
Scanning and splitting scenes
A single DV tape may contain video that was captured at different times. VideoStudio
automatically detects these segments and saves them as separate files.
Capture and import 37
To find scenes in your video
•Drag the Shuttle Slider to move forward and back through the footage at variable
speeds.
To use Split by scene
1In the Capture workspace, click Capture Video.
2Enable Split by scene on the Capture Video Options Panel. VideoStudio will
automatically look for the scenes according to their shooting date and time and capture
them as separate files.
38 VideoStudio
Project basics 39
Project basics
VideoStudio combines the video, titles, sounds, and effects in a process called rendering.
Project settings determine how your movie project is rendered when you preview it. The
output video can then be played back on your computer, burned to disc, or uploaded to the
Internet.
This section contains the following topics:
• Creating new projects and opening projects
• Setting project properties
• Creating custom profiles
• Using Smart Proxy for a faster, smoother editing experience
• Previewing your project or clips
• Undoing and redoing actions
• Showing and hiding grid lines
• Saving projects
• Saving projects by using Smart Package
• Adding cues and chapters
Creating new projects and opening projects
When you start VideoStudio, it automatically opens a new project and lets you start creating
your movie. New projects are always based on the default settings of the application. You
can also create HTML5 projects that you can post on the Web.
You can open previously saved projects and if you’d like to combine several projects, you
can add previously saved projects to a new project.
To create a new project
• Click File >New Project [Ctrl + N].
To create a new HTML5 project
• Click File > New HTML5 Project [Ctrl + M].
40 VideoStudio
To create a new FastFlick project
1Click Tools > FastFlick.
2From the FastFlick window, click Menu > New Project.
For more information, see “FastFlick” on page 217.
To open an existing project
• Click File > Open Project [Ctrl + O].
To add an existing project to a new project
1In the Library, click the Media button .
2Drag a project file (.vsp) from the Library to the Timeline.
If the file isn’t in the Library, click the Import Media Files button , navigate to a
project file (stored in My Projects folder by default), select the file, and click Open.
All tracks, media, and elements of the project appear in the Timeline.
Before you import a project (VSP file) to the Library, ensure that all links in the project
are working. Projects with linking issues cannot be added to existing projects.
If you want to flatten the project to add it to a specific track, press and hold the Shift
key before you release the mouse button.
Setting project properties
Project Properties serve as your template for your movie projects. The project settings in
the Project Properties dialog box determine the appearance and quality of a project when
it is previewed on-screen.
The project properties are based on a profile. You can use an existing profile or create a
custom profile. For more information about custom profiles, see “Creating custom profiles”
on page 41.
To modify project properties
1Click Settings > Project Properties.
2Choose the appropriate setting options in the Project Properties dialog box.
3Click OK.
Project basics 41
When customizing project settings, it is recommended that you make the settings the
same as the attributes of the video footage that will be captured to avoid distorting the
video images and can help prevent jumping frames. However, preview performance
might decrease for projects with high resolution files, depending on the system
specifications.
Creating custom profiles
Profiles contain settings that define how to create the final movie file. By using the preset
profiles provided by VideoStudio or by creating and saving your own profiles in the Movie
Profile Manager, you can have multiple versions of your final movie. For example, you can
create profiles that provide high-quality output for DVD and video recording, and you can
create profiles that output to smaller, lower-quality files ideal for Web streaming and e-mail
distribution.
You can also choose profiles and create custom profiles in the Share workspace before you
output your movie project. For more information, see “Working with custom profiles in the
Share workspace” on page 254.
To create custom profiles
1Click Settings > Movie Profile Manager. The Movie Profile Manager dialog box opens.
2Click the Computer or 3D tab.
3From the Format drop-list, choose a file format.
4Click New.
5In the New Profile Options dialog box, click the VideoStudio tab, and type a name in
the Profile name box.
6Click the General tab, and choose the settings you want.
Note: Additional tabs and settings are available depending on the type of format you
choose.
7Click OK.
To choose a custom profile for your project
1Click Settings > Movie Profile Manager. The Movie Profile Manager dialog box opens.
2Click the Computer or 3D tab.
3From the Format drop-list, choose a file format.
4In the Profile area, choose Personal Profiles from the drop-list.
Previously saved custom profiles are listed in the box below the drop-list.
42 VideoStudio
5Click the profile you want, and click Close.
Using Smart Proxy for a faster, smoother editing experience
The main purpose of Smart Proxy is to provide a more fluid editing and previewing
experience when working with large, high resolution video files.
Smart Proxy creates lower resolution working copies of larger source files. These smaller
files are called “proxy” files. Using proxy files speeds up editing of high resolution projects
(for example, projects that have HDV and AVCHD source files).
Proxy files are source-dependent rather than project-dependent. In other words, proxy files
can be shared among different projects.
When you render a video project, the original, high-quality video source files are used.
You can use the Smart Proxy Manager to enable or disable Smart Proxy, change the
default resolution threshold that enables Smart Proxy, and access the Smart Proxy File
Manager and Smart Proxy Queue Manager to manage existing and future proxy files.
Smart Proxy can be set and adjusted in the VideoStudio workspaces or in the Multi-Camera
Editor.
To enable or disable Smart Proxy
• Click the Settings menu or button (Multi-Camera Editor) > Smart Proxy Manager
> Enable Smart Proxy.
Note: The Smart Proxy feature is enabled by default if the computer’s hardware can
support the feature.
To set the resolution threshold and location for Smart Proxy files
1Select Settings > Smart Proxy Manager > Settings.
2In the Smart Proxy dialog box, set a resolution threshold for the creation of proxy files
and choose a proxy folder.
To manage proxy files
1Select Settings > Smart Proxy Manager, and choose one of the following options:
• Smart Proxy File Manager — Lists the source and proxy files. You can use this
manager to delete proxy files you no longer need.
• Smart Proxy Queue Manager — Lists source files for which proxy files will be
generated (according to the current settings)
Project basics 43
Previewing your project or clips
The Play button in the Navigation area of the Player panel serves two purposes:
• Playback your entire project
• Playback a selected clip
While working on your project, you will want to preview your work frequently to see how
your project is progressing. Instant Playback allows you to quickly preview changes in your
project. Playback quality depends on your computer’s resources.
You may choose to play only a part of your project. The selected range of frames to preview
is referred to as the preview range, and it is marked as a colored bar on the Ruler Panel.
If you have a high definition project (HD), you can enable HD Preview so that you can
preview your project with a clearer, higher quality result. The speed depends on your system.
To preview a project or clip
1In the Navigation area of the Player panel, click Project or Clip.
2 Click Play.
Note: For Clip, only the currently selected clip plays.
If you want to preview a high definition project in full HD, enable the HD Preview button.
To play part of a project or clip
1Use the Trim Markers or the Mark-in/out buttons to select the preview range.
2With the preview range selected, in the Navigation area of the Player panel, click Project
or Clip.
3Click Play.
Undoing and redoing actions
You can undo or redo the last set of actions that you performed while working on your
movie.
To undo the last action
• Click the Undo button on the Toolbar.
44 VideoStudio
To redo the last undone action
• Click the Redo button on the Toolbar.
You can adjust the number of undo levels in the Preferences dialog box.
You can also use the keyboard shortcuts [Ctrl + Z] and [Ctrl + Y] to undo and redo
actions respectively.
Showing and hiding grid lines
You can use grid lines to guide you when repositioning or resizing photos and videos. You
can also use grid lines to line up titles in your movie.
To show grid lines
1 In the Edit workspace, double-click a clip to display the Options panel.
2Click the Edit tab.
3Check Show grid lines.
Click the Grid line options button to adjust grid line settings.
Saving projects
You can save projects so that you can edit or complete them later. To protect your work, you
can enable automatic saving at regular intervals.
To save your project
• Click File > Save [Ctrl + S].
Note: VideoStudio project files are saved in *.vsp file format. HTML5 video projects are
saved in *.vsh file format.
Project basics 45
To automatically save your work
1Click Settings > Preferences and click the General tab.
2Choose Automatic save interval: and specify the time interval between saves.
Note: This setting is set at 10 minutes by default.
Save your project frequently to avoid accidental loss of work.
Saving projects by using Smart Package
Packaging a video project is useful if you want to back up your work or transfer your files for
sharing or for editing in a laptop or another computer. You can also package your project as
a zipped folder or prepare them for online storage using WinZip® file compression
technology that is integrated into the Smart Package feature.
To save projects by using Smart Package
1Click File > Smart Package and choose to pack your project as a folder or Zip file.
2Specify the Folder path, Project folder name and Project file name.
If you want to include tracker or disc settings, enable the corresponding check box.
3Click OK.
You need to save your project before you use Smart Package.
Adding cues and chapters
Adding cues and chapters helps you to navigate through a project and allows you to place
comments on your Timeline. These cue and chapter marks are used mainly as project guides
or disc menu chapters and interactive links in HTML5 projects.
Cue points serve as markers that help in lining up media clips in a project. Chapter points
specify disc menu chapters or hyperlinks.
To add project cues
1Click the Chapter/Cue Menu arrow (small grey triangle).
2Click Cue Point.
46 VideoStudio
3Drag the cursor to where you want to add a cue point and click the bar below the
Timeline ruler. Notice that a blue arrow icon is added.
4To edit a cue point, click the Chapter/Cue Menu arrow, and click Cue Point Manager.
You can add, delete, rename, and navigate (Go To) cue points.
To remove chapters and cues, drag the markers outside the Timeline ruler and release
the mouse button. You can also drag the Timeline ruler to a chapter or cue point and
click Add/Remove Chapter Point or Add/Remove Cue Point (the green or blue
triangle to the left of the Chapter/Cue Menu arrow).
To add chapters
1Click the Chapter/Cue Menu arrow (small grey triangle).
2Click Chapter Point.
3Drag the cursor where you want to add a chapter and click the bar below the Timeline
ruler. Notice that a green arrow icon appears to indicate chapter points in your movie.
If you want to reposition the chapter point, drag it to the position you want.
4To edit a chapter, click the Chapter/Cue Menu arrow, and click Chapter Point Manager.
You can add, delete, rename, and navigate (Go To) chapter points.
To remove chapters and cues, drag the markers outside the Timeline ruler and release
the mouse button. You can also drag the Timeline ruler to a chapter or cue point and
click Add/Remove Chapter Point or Add/Remove Cue Point (the green or blue
triangle to the left of the Chapter/Cue Menu arrow).
Cue points
Add/Remove Cue Point
Chapter points
Project basics 47
You can also drag the Timeline slider to the desired chapter point position in your
project. Click the Add/Remove Chapter Point.
48 VideoStudio
Templates 49
Templates
Templates let you fast track your projects. You can use ready-made templates, or you can
create your own.
This section contains the following topics:
• Using Instant Project templates
• Split screen video templates
Using Instant Project templates
Instant Project templates let you fast-track the movie creation process by providing you with
pre-assembled movie projects. Simply exchange the placeholder clips and photos with your
own media and you’re done. They are also a great way to learn about the components of a
movie project.
You can use one template for the entire movie, or you can add more than one template. For
example, you can use different templates for the start, middle, and end of your movie. You
can even create and save custom templates. For example, if you are creating a series of
videos, you can create a template so that all the videos have a consistent style.
To open an Instant Project template
1In the Edit workspace, click the Template button in the Library panel.
2In the category list, click any Instant Project category.
Note: For information about Split Screen templates, see “Split screen video templates”
on page 51.
50 VideoStudio
o
3To preview a template, click the template thumbnail, and click the Play in the Player
panel.
4Right-click the template thumbnail and choose the point of insertion in the Timeline
between Add at the beginning and Add at the end.
The template is added to the Timeline.
You can also add a template to your project by dragging the thumbnail to the
Timeline.
To replace clips, photos, and music in an Instant Project template
• Do one of the following:
• On the Timeline toolbar, enable the Replace Mode button (the button changes to
blue when active) and drag a clip, photo, or music track from the Library to the
appropriate placeholder clip, photo, or music track on the Timeline. You can turn off
Replace Mode when you are finished to return to the previous Timeline mode.
• Drag a clip, photo, or music track from the Library to the appropriate placeholder clip,
photo, or music track on the Timeline, and press CTRL before you release the mouse
button.
When you open a template in the Timeline, any clips that have been marked as
placeholders display a blue check mark in the upper right corner.
To create an Instant Project template
1Open the video project that you want to save as a template.
2In the Timeline, right-click and choose Mark Replaceable Clips from the context menu.
Templates 51
An orange outline appears around the project in the Timeline.
3Click all the clips that you want to mark as replaceable.
An orange outline and a check mark appears on the selected clips.
4In the upper right corner of the Timeline, click Done.
5Click File > Export as template > Instant Project Template.
6Click Yes when prompted to save your project.
7Enter a File name, Subject and Description.
8Browse for the folder where you want to save your template and click Save.
9In the Export project as template dialog box, move the slider to display the thumbnail
that you want to use for the template.
10 Specify the path and folder name. Choose the category from the drop-list where you
want to keep your template.
Template details will also be displayed.
11 Click OK.
To impor t project templates
1In the Edit workspace, click the Template button in the Library panel.
2Click the Import a project template button and browse for the *.vpt file that you
want to import.
3Click Open.
Split screen video templates
You can easily create a split screen video in VideoStudio to play multiple videos in a preset
or customized template. Custom options include keyframes to help you create dynamic
templates that include motion.
52 VideoStudio
You can use a template to create a split screen video project or create your own split
screen template.
Before you start
• Ensure that the video clips you want to use are imported to the Library.
• Preview the video clips you want to use so that you have an idea what shapes will suit the
content that you want to focus on. For example, if the main action is vertical, it won’t fit a
horizontal shape very well.
To choose and fill a split screen template
1In the Edit workspace, click the Template button in the Library panel.
2Click Split Screen in the category list.
3Drag the thumbnail for the template that you want to use into the Timeline.
You will be prompted to enable Replace Mode. Click Yes to facilitate placeholder
replacement. For more information, see “Using Replace Mode” on page 70.
4Drag a video or photo from the Library to the appropriate placeholder and release the
mouse button.
5In the Player panel, click the Resize/Crop drop-down , and enable the Scale
mode (button is blue when mode is active). Select a clip in the Timeline and do any
of the following:
• Resize the selected clip by dragging the sizing orange nodes that appear in the preview
window.
• Position the clip by dragging it in the preview window.
6In the Timeline, click another track to adjust the other clips in the template.
To create a split screen template
1On the Timeline toolbar, click the Split Screen Template Creator button .
Templates 53
2In the Template Editor, choose a tool from the Splitting Tools panel, and drag in the
editor window to split the area into different clip zones.
A number appears in each clip zone.
If you want to add a shape, in the Graphics area, click a shape and drag in the editor
window.
3To adjust the lines, shapes, or graphics, in the Splitting Tools or Graphics area, choose
the corresponding Select tool , and select the element that you want to edit in the
editor window.
You can drag the lines and shapes to reposition them and resize them. You can also
adjust the Rotation, Border width, and Border color, and Opacity in the Properties
area. For shapes, you can also apply Swivel and Tilt settings.
4To add motion to your template, use the scrubber and keyframe controls at the bottom
of the window to add keyframes and assign new property settings and/or move the
template elements. Use the playback controls to review the motion.
Note: You can copy a keyframe and its settings by right-clicking the keyframe, and
choosing Copy in the context menu. Move your pointer to a new position on the
timeline, right-click and choose Paste. You can also copy and paste keyframes between
different shapes in your template.
Drop zone
Selected item
(example is a
Graphic)
Add/Remove Keyframe Scrubber/
Playhead
Previous keyframe/Next keyframe
54 VideoStudio
5If you want to save content with your template (for example, an image or video that will
be part of the template), using the panel on the left-side of the window, navigate to the
content you want to add and drag the corresponding thumbnail to the number you want
in the drop zone.
Note: To replace the content, drag different content to the drop zone.
6To size or position the content within the template, click the drop zone for the item you
want to edit, and in the edit window, drag the nodes on the bounding box to adjust the
size or drag the bounding box to a new position.
Clicking the item that you want to adjust in the drop zone is an easy way to select it.
You can then use the bounding box to adjust the position and size of the content within
the split screen frame.
7When your template is complete, click the Export as template button to save your
template. Your template is saved in the Library to the Template category, Split Screen
folder.
8Click OK to return to the Timeline.
9Add and edit the clips as you would with an existing template.
You can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to the right of the editor window
timeline to stretch or expand the timeline units. This can be helpful when using
keyframes.
Organize and find media 55
Organize and find media
Organize the media clips in the Library so you can access assets for your projects with ease
and speed. You can also import a Library to restore media files and other library information.
This section contains the following topics:
• Using the Library
• Sorting, viewing, and filtering clips in the Library
• Searching the Library
• Resizing thumbnails
• Tagging files as 3D
Using the Library
The Library is a storage depot for everything you need to create a movie: video clips, photos,
audio files, templates, transitions, titles, filters, graphics, and tracking paths.
Create a custom library for your project. You can select, add, and delete media in the Library.
If the media files are moved from their original location, you can automatically restore the
links. Remember to export the library to create a backup on the hard drive or an external
storage device. You can then import the library at a later time.
After completing a project, you can reset the Library to restore the default media clips. The
files you added will be deleted from the Library, but not from their original location. You can
always choose to re-import your media files into the Library.
56 VideoStudio
Right-click a clip in the Library to view the clip's properties as well as copy, delete, or
split clips by scene.
You can also trim a clip in the Library by using dragging the Scrubber in the Player
panel to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points.
Library files that you use in a project are identified by a green check mark in the upper
right corner of the thumbnail.
For information about supported media formats, see “Supported file formats” on page 10.
To select media in the Library
•In the Library, do one of the following:
• Select one media file — click a thumbnail.
• Select multiple media files — press and hold [Ctrl], and then click the thumbnails you
want.
• Select a sequence of media files — click the first thumbnail in the sequence, press and
hold [Shift], and then click the last thumbnail in the sequence.
• Select a grouping of media files — drag your pointer across the thumbnails that you
want to select.
Organize and find media 57
To add media clips to the Library
1Click Add to create a new library folder where you want to store your media clips.
Note: You can create custom folders to separate your personal clips from sample clips
or to keep all clips that belong to a project in a single folder.
2Click the Import Media Files button to locate your files.
3Select the files you want to import.
4Click Open.
Click Browse to open the File Explorer where you can drag and drop files to the
Library.
To delete media clips from the Library
1In the Library, select a clip and press [Delete].
Or, right-click the clip in the Library and click Delete.
Note: While the clips are referenced in the Library, they actually remain in their original
location, so when you delete a clip from the Library, only the reference is deleted. You
can still access the actual file in the location where it is stored.
2When prompted, confirm that you want to delete the thumbnail from the Library.
To automatically locate and restore links to media files
• Click File > Relink.
A message appears that notifies you about the number of clips that are successfully
relinked.
Note: If the links to some clips are not restored, you can restore them manually by
browsing for the corresponding file on your computer.
To export a library
1Click Settings > Library Manager > Export library and specify a folder location where
you want to save your Library.
2Click OK.
This action creates a backup of the virtual media file information of your current library
in the directory you specify.
58 VideoStudio
To import a Library
1Click on Settings > Library Manager > Import Library and find the folder that you
want to import.
2Click OK.
To reset the Library
• Click Settings > Library Manager > Reset Library.
This action restores the Library to the default settings and deletes all user added files.
Sorting, viewing, and filtering clips in the Library
There are different ways to sort, search, view, and filter your media clips in the Library:
• Sort media by properties such as name, file type, date, and resolution.
• View media as thumbnails or as a list that includes details about the files.
• Filter media by hiding or showing media by type—photos, videos, and audio
To sort media clips
• Click the Sort clips in the Library button , and select a Sort by property in the menu.
To change the media clips view
• Click the List view button to display your media clips in a list that includes file
properties, or click the Thumbnail view button to display thumbnails.
If you want to sort the media clips in List view, click a property title, such as Name, Type,
or Date.
You can also click the Show/Hide title button to show or hide the file names of the
media clips.
List view shows properties such as file name, media type, date, duration, resolution,
frames per second (FPS), and codecs.
Organize and find media 59
To show or hide media clips
• Click one or more of the following buttons:
• Show / Hide Videos
• Show / Hide Photos
• Show / Hide Audio Files
To change the Library panel view
• You can use the icons in the Library panel to display templates, transitions, titles,
graphics, filters, and tracking paths.
Searching the Library
You can use the Search box in the Library to find specific media and other Library assets,
such as transitions, titles, graphics, or effects.
To search the Library
1In the Library panel, choose the category of assets that you want to display.
2In the Search box, type the name of the file you want to find or a file type.
If you want to set conditions for the search, click the Search icon , and choose Match
any words or Match all words from the menu.
60 VideoStudio
The results display in the Library panel.
Note: You must clear the Search box to restore your view of all assets. Click the Clear
Search button (X) on the right side of the Search box.
Resizing thumbnails
VideoStudio allows you to adjust the size of thumbnails for easier access to the different
media clips in the Library.
To adjust thumbnail size
• Move the slider to the left or right to decrease or increase thumbnail size.
Tagging files as 3D
In VideoStudio, MVC and MPO clips are automatically detected and tagged as 3D during
import. You can also tag 2D clips to simulate the 3D effect when you render the project as a
3D movie. Tagged 3D media clips are marked with 3D for easy identification and to enable
the 3D media clip for 3D editing.
The Left-Right format for side-by-side 3D is a popular choice for delivering content and is
used mostly in media clips imported or captured from 3D video cameras. The Right-Left
option is used mostly in media clips acquired from the Web.
To tag video and photo clips as 3D
1Right-click 3D files imported into the Library or the Timeline and choose Tag as 3D
from the right-click menu. The 3D Settings dialog box is displayed.
Thumbnail size
slider
Organize and find media 61
2Choose one of the following options to set the correct format for 3D content:
• 2D — the default setting if the selected clip is not recognized as 3D.
• Side-by-side — delivers 3D content by splitting the horizontal resolution of each frame
for the left and right eye. Side-by-side 3D is widely used by cable channels for
delivering content for 3D ready TV sets because of lower bandwidth usage. Choose
between the Left-Right and Right-Left formats.
• Over-Under — delivers 3D content by splitting the vertical resolution of each frame for
the left and right eye. The higher count of horizontal pixels makes this option more
suitable for displaying panning motion. Choose between the Left-Right and Right-Left
formats.
• Multiview Video Coding (MVC) — generates a high-definition two-view
(stereoscopic) video or a multi-view 3D video.
• Multi-view image — delivers high-quality stereoscopic images such as Multi-Picture
Object (MPO) files that are shot using 3D cameras.
3Click OK.
The thumbnail of the media clip in the Library and Timeline now has the 3D tag.
62 VideoStudio
Timeline 63
Timeline
The Timeline is where you assemble the media clips for your video project.
This section contains the following topics:
• Switching between Timeline views
• Showing and hiding tracks
• Adding and swapping tracks
• Renaming tracks
• Adjusting track height
• Grouping and ungrouping
• Using Ripple Editing mode
• Using Replace Mode
Switching between Timeline views
Two types of views are available in the Timeline: Storyboard View and Timeline View.
Storyboard View
The fastest and simplest way to organize photos and video clips in a project is to use the
Storyboard View. Each thumbnail in the storyboard represents a photo, video clip, or a
transition. Thumbnails are shown in the order in which they appear in your project, and you
can drag thumbnails to rearrange them. The duration of each clip is shown at the bottom of
each thumbnail. In addition, you can insert transitions between video clips, and you can trim
a selected video clip in the Preview Window.
VideoStudio Storyboard View
64 VideoStudio
Timeline View
Timeline View gives you the most comprehensive display of the elements in your movie
project. It divides a project into separate tracks for video, overlay, title, voice, and music.
VideoStudio Timeline View
Part Description
1 — Show All Visible Tracks Displays all tracks in your project.
2 — Track Manager Lets you manage the tracks visible in the Timeline.
3 — Add / Remove Chapter or
Cue
Lets you set chapter or cue points in your movie.
4 — Timeline ruler Helps you determine clip and project length by displaying the
project's timecode increments in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames.
5 — Track button Shows / Hides individual tracks.
6 — Enable / Disable Ripple
Editing
When enabled, clips maintain their relative positions when a
clip is added to the track. For more information, see “Using
Ripple Editing mode” on page 68.
7 — Mute/Unmute Lets you mute or unmute the audio for the track.
8 — Track Transparency Opens Track Transparency mode. See “Track transparency” on
page 102.
9 — Automatically scroll
Timeline
Enables or disables scrolling along the Timeline when you
preview a clip that extends beyond the current view.
5
6
3
11
13
14
15
14
2
12
910
7
8
Timeline 65
You can use the mouse wheel to scroll through the Timeline.
Right-click on any track button and choose Select all media to select all media clips
that are in the track.
When the pointer is at the Zoom controls or Timeline ruler, you can use the mouse
wheel to zoom in and out of the Timeline.
To switch between Storyboard View and Timeline View
• Click the buttons at the left side of the Toolbar.
Showing and hiding tracks
You can show or hide tracks. When tracks are hidden, they do not show during playback or
when you render your video. Selectively showing or hiding tracks lets you see the effect of
each track in a project without having to delete and reimport media clips repeatedly.
To show or hide tracks
• Click the Track button of the track that you want to show or hide.
The track is dimmed in the Timeline when it is hidden.
Adding and swapping tracks
The Track Manager allows you to take more control of the Timeline. You can have up to 49
Overlay tracks, two Title tracks, and eight Music tracks.
In an HTML5 project, you can have up to three Background tracks, 47 Overlay tracks, two
Title tracks, and three Music tracks.
10 — Scroll controls Lets you move around your project by using the left and right
buttons or dragging the Scroll Bar.
11 — Video Track Contains videos, photos, graphics, and transitions. Note that in
HTML 5 mode, you can also have a Background Track.
12 — Overlay Tracks Contains overlay clips, which can be video, photo, graphic, or
color clips. Note the HTML 5 projects also have overlay tracks.
13 — Title Track Contains title clips.
14 — Voice Track Contains voice-over clips.
15 — Music Track Contains music clips from audio files.
Part Description
66 VideoStudio
There is only one Video track and one Voice track.
You can also insert and delete additional overlay, title, and music tracks, as well as swap
overlay tracks directly in the Timeline.
To add tracks with the Track Manager
1Click Track Manager on the Toolbar.
2Specify the number of tracks you want to display from the drop-down list for each track.
Click Set as Default to save current settings as defaults for all new projects.
You can also reduce the number of optional tracks that you have added by adjusting
the Track Manager settings
To insert or delete tracks in the Timeline
1In the Timeline, right-click a track button for a track type that you want to insert or
delete, and choose one of the following menu commands:
• Insert Track Above — Inserts a track above the selected track
• Insert Track Below — Inserts a track below the selected track
• Delete Track — Removes the track from the Timeline
A track of the same type is inserted or the selected track is removed.
The menu items listed above appear only if the action is permitted. For example, Delete
Track is not available if you have not added optional tracks in the project. Similarly, if
you already have the maximum number of tracks for the selected track type, the insert
track menu commands do not display.
To swap Overlay tracks
1Right-click on the Overlay track head area, and select Swap Tracks.
Timeline 67
2Choose the corresponding Overlay track that you want to swap.
All media in the selected Overlay tracks swap.
This feature only works if you are working on projects with multiple Overlay Tracks.
Renaming tracks
You can rename tracks to give them meaningful names to help you organize your project.
To rename a track
1In the Timeline, click the name of the track listed in the track header.
2When the insert text cursor appears, type a new name for the track.
Adjusting track height
You can adjust the height of individual tracks. For example, you can increase the height of
the track that you are working on to make the content more visible. For example, if you have
the Sound Mixer mode enabled, a wider track lets you more easily view the waveform and
adjust sound level nodes.
The height of the blue track at the bottom has been increased.
To adjust track height
1In the Timeline, position the pointer along the bottom edge of the track that you want to
adjust.
2When the double arrow displays, drag to increase or decrease the track height.
Note: There is a minimum track height.
68 VideoStudio
The scroll bar along the right edge of the Timeline becomes active if the tracks exceed
the space available in the Timeline panel.
Grouping and ungrouping
You can group and ungroup items that are in the timeline. For example, you can select
multiple clips or photos from one or more tracks and group them so that you can move them
all at the same time or apply an effect to the group. You can ungroup the elements at any
time.
How can you tell if an item is part of a group?
When you click an item that is grouped in the Timeline, all items in the group appear
highlighted (orange outline).
When you click a grouped item in the Timeline, all items in the group appear
highlighted (orange outline).
To group items in the Timeline
1In the Edit workspace, ensure that the items you want to group have been added to the
Timeline.
2Hold Shift, and in the Timeline, click all the items that you want to group.
3Right-click a selected item and choose Group from the context-menu.
To ungroup items in the Timeline
1In the Timeline, right-click one of the grouped items and choose Ungroup from the
context-menu.
Using Ripple Editing mode
Use Ripple Editing mode to maintain the original synchronization of tracks when moving,
inserting, or deleting clips.
For example, if you add a 10-second clip at the beginning of the Video track, the other clips
move to the right by 10 seconds. This makes editing more efficient by keeping all tracks
synchronized.
Timeline 69
Original Timeline
Ripple Editing off: When a clip in the Video track is moved, the other tracks remain
unchanged.
Ripple Editing on: When a clip in the Video track is moved, the clips in all other tracks
that have Ripple Editing enabled are moved to maintain synchronization.
To use Ripple Editing
1In the Timeline, click the Enable/Disable Ripple Editing button in the Video track
header area.
The button changes to blue when Ripple Editing is active.
2Click the Enable/Disable Ripple Editing button in the header of each track that you
want to keep synchronized with the Video track.
Note: You can turn Ripple Editing mode off at any time by clicking the Enable/Disable
Ripple Editing button for individual tracks, or by clicking the arrow next to the button on
70 VideoStudio
the Video track to open a menu that lets you Deselect All, Select All, or turn the mode
on or off for individual tracks.
Using Replace Mode
When you enable Replace Mode, you can quickly replace a Timeline clip by dragging a clip
from the Library onto the clip that you want to replace in the Timeline. It is particularly useful
when you are using templates and you want to replace several placeholder clips. You can
toggle Replace Mode on and off from the Timeline toolbar at any time. When Replace
Mode is not active, you can replace timeline clips with library clips by pressing and holding
the CTRL key while you drag and drop.
To toggle Replace Mode on and off
• On the Timeline toolbar, click the Replace Mode button .
The button is blue when the mode is active.
When you add a template to the Timeline, a message displays that lets you activate
Replace Mode. You enable or disable this message from Settings > Preferences. Click
the General tab, and in the Project area, mark or unmark the Show Replace Mode
message when adding an instant project to the Timeline check box.
Edit media 71
Edit media
Videos clips, photos and audio clips are the foundation of your project and manipulating
them is the most important skill you can master.
This section contains the following topics:
• Using the Options panel in the Edit workspace
• Converting multiple files
• Adding video clips
• Adding photos
• Moving clips in the Timeline
• Rotate a video or photo
• Crop a video or photo
• Resizing/scaling a video or photo
• Time remapping
• Modifying video playback speed
• Using Freeze Frame
• Replacing media clips
• Trimming a clip
• Using Slip, Slide, Roll, or Stretch tools on the Timeline
• Using Split by Scene
• Trimming video into multiple clips
• Saving trimmed clips
• Taking a snapshot from a video clip
• Lens Correction
• Pan and zoom for video and photos
• Working with the Mask Creator (Ultimate)
• Track transparency
Using the Options panel in the Edit workspace
The Options panel in the Edit workspace allows you to modify the media, transitions, titles,
graphics, animation, and filters that you add to the Timeline. The controls available depend
on the type of media that you select and whether the media is in an overlay track or the main
video track.
72 VideoStudio
Edit tab
•Duration — Displays the duration of the selected clip in hours:minutes:seconds:frames.
You can trim the selected clip by changing the clip duration.
•Clip volume — Allows you to adjust the volume of the audio segment of your video.
•Mute — Silences the audio segment of your video without deleting it.
•Fade-in/out — Gradually increases/decreases the volume of the clip for a smooth
transition. Select Settings > Preferences > Edit to set the fade-in/out duration.
•Rotate — Rotates the video clip.
•Reverse video — Plays the video backward.
•Speed/Time-lapse — Allows you to adjust the playback speed of your clip and apply
Time-lapse and Strobe effects.
•Variable Speed — Allows you to adjust the playback speed of a clip at different intervals.
•Split Audio — Allows you to separate the audio from a video file and place it on the
Voice Track.
•Split by Scene — Splits a captured DV AVI file based on the shooting date and time, or
the changes in video content (i.e., motion change, camera shifting, brightness change,
etc.).
•Multi-Trim Video — Allows you to choose desired segments from a video file and
extract them.
•Resampling Option — Allows you to set the aspect ratio for the video or access Pan &
Zoom.
For overlays, options include the following:
•Transparency, Border, and Border Color
Edit media 73
•Alignment Options — Allows you to adjust object position in preview window. Set the
option through the Alignment Options pop-up menu.
•Show grid lines — Select to display the grid lines. Click to open a dialog box where
you can specify settings for the grid lines.
•Basic Motion — Allows you to set the direction and style of entry/exit of the clip. This
can be set to static, top/bottom, left/right, top-left/top-right, bottom-left/bottom-right.
As for the style, you can set direction of entry/exit of clips through: Rotate before/after
pause duration and Fade in/out motion effect.
•Advanced Motion — Opens the Customize Motion dialog box which allows you to
customize the motion of overlays and titles. For more information, see “Customizing
motion” on page 186.
Effect tab
•Replace last filter — Allows the last filter applied to a clip to be replaced when you drag
a new filter onto the clip. Clear this option if you want to add multiple filters to your clips.
•Applied filters — Lists the video filters that were applied to a clip. Click or to
arrange the order of the filters; click to remove a filter.
•Presets — Provides various filter presets. Choose a preset from the drop-list.
•Customize Filter — Allows you to define the behavior of the filter throughout the clip.
•Audio Filter — Lets you apply a filter to enhance audio. For example, you can amplify,
add an echo, adjust pitch, or choose from different leveling options.
Note that audio clips in the Voice and Music tracks have different options. For more
information, see “Audio” on page 111.
Blending tab
• Choose from Blending Modes, or in the Matte Modes, choose a Mask Frame or Video
Mask. For more information, see “Blending overlay clips with the background” on
page 159, “Adding a mask frame” on page 163, or “Using video masks with overlay clips”
on page 164.
Chroma Key
•Chroma Key — Allows you to create transparent areas by choosing a color. For more
information, see “Using Chroma Key for a green screen effect” on page 159.
Color tab
•Basic: Allows you to Select preset to choose from a list of color/tone presets or choose a
custom preset that you have saved. In the Color Correction area, choose from Hue,
Exposure, Contrast, Gamma, Blacks, Shadows, MidRange, Highlights, Whites,
Vibrance, Saturation, Clarity and Haze adjustments. You can also use the White
74 VideoStudio
Balance feature to make auto tone adjustments. For more information, see “Basic color
and tone correction” on page 168, “Adjusting white balance” on page 169.
•Tone Cur ve: For information, see “Tone Curve” on page 170.
•HSL Tuning: For information, see “HSL Tuning” on page 171.
•Color Wheel: For information, see “Color Wheel” on page 172.
•LUT Profile: For information see “Color grading with lookup tables (LUT profiles)” on
page 175.
Lens/Lens Correction tab
Lets you access presets and controls for correcting distortion caused capturing footage with
a wide-angle lens. For more information, see “Lens Correction” on page 91.
Converting multiple files
Batch Convert allows you to convert a large number of files to another format in sequence.
You can also create a profile for performing batch conversions. This allows you to save the
batch conversion settings and apply them to future batch conversions.
To run a Batch Conver t
1Click File > Batch Convert.
2Click Add and then choose the files you want to convert.
3Select an output folder in Save in folder.
4In Save as type, choose your desired output type.
If you want to set more advanced saving options, click the Options button.
5Click Convert.
The result is shown in the Task Repor t dialog box. Click OK to finish.
To create a Batch Convert profile
1Click File > Batch Convert.
2In the Batch Convert dialog box, choose the settings that you want to save as a profile.
3Click the Profile button and choose Add Profile.
4In the Add Template dialog box, type a name for the profile.
You can apply a Batch Convert profile by clicking the Profile button and choosing the
profile that you want to apply.
You delete a Batch Convert profile by clicking the Profile button, choosing Delete
Profile, and choosing the profile that you want to delete.
Edit media 75
Adding video clips
There are several ways of inserting video clips to the Timeline:
• Select a clip in the Library and drag it to the Video Track or Overlay Track. Multiple clips
can be selected by pressing [Shift].
• Right-click a clip in the Library and select Insert To: Video Track or Insert To: Overlay
Track.
• Select one or more video files in Windows Explorer and drag them to the Video Track or
Overlay Track.
• To insert a clip from a file folder directly to the Video Track or Overlay Track, right-click
the Timeline, select Insert Video and locate the video to use.
3D media clips are supported in VideoStudio. You can tag 3D media clips so that they
can be easily identified and edited with 3D editing features. For more information, see
“Tagging files as 3D” on page 60.
Aside from video files, you can also add video from DVD formatted discs.
Adding photos
Photo clips are added to the Video Track the same way as video clips. Before you start adding
photos to your project, determine the photo size that you want for all your photos. By
default, VideoStudio adjusts the size to keep the photo’s aspect ratio.
Corel® PaintShop® Pro PSPIMAGE files (*.pspimage) are supported in VideoStudio.
PSPIMAGE files that are imported into the Library have a multiple layer indicator, so you can
distinguish them from other types of media clips.
To make all inserted photos the same size as the frame size of your project
1Click Settings > Preferences > Edit.
2Change the Image resampling option default to Fit to project size.
76 VideoStudio
To import PSPIMAGE files into the Timeline
1Right-click a clip in the Library.
2Click Insert To and select the track where you want to add your media clip.
3Choose one of the following options:
• Layers - lets you include the layers of a file into separate tracks
• Flatten - lets you insert a flattened image into a single track
You can also drag the file directly into the Timeline and the program will automatically
add the layers to separate tracks. To insert a flattened image, hold down [Shift] and
drag the file.
Moving clips in the Timeline
You can easily move clips in the Timeline. For example, you can move a clip to align it with
clips on other tracks, to close gaps after trimming, or to overlap one clip with another to
create a transition.
To move a clip
1In the Timeline, do any of the following:
• Move a clip: Click a clip, and drag it to a new position or to a new track.
• Move a clip one frame at a time: Click a clip, and press ALT while using the right or
left arrow key to move the clip.
• Remove all gaps in a track: Right-click the track head, and in the context-menu,
choose Remove all gaps.
Rotate a video or photo
You can rotate video clips and photos to change the orientation of a video. For example, you
can rotate a video that you have captured on your phone in portrait orientation to convert
it to landscape orientation or you can flip an upside-down video.
How to rotate a video clip or photo
1 In the Timeline, click a video clip or photo.
2In the Options panel, click the Edit tab, and click Rotate Left or Rotate Right until
the orientation you want displays in the Preview panel.
Edit media 77
Crop a video or photo
You can crop a video or photo so that only the area you select appears during playback.
Note that cropping is not destructive—it does not affect the original video or photo. You can
change the crop area in your project file at any time.
How to crop a video
1In the Timeline, click a video or photo.
2In the Player panel, click the Resize/Crop drop-down and choose the Crop tool .
3In the preview window, do any of the following:
• Size: Drag the sizing handles on the crop rectangle to set the crop area. Drag a corner
handle to maintain the aspect ratio.
• Position: With your pointer inside the crop rectangle, drag the crop area to a new
position.
Resizing/scaling a video or photo
You can resize/scale a video or photo interactively so that you can see a background or to
create a picture-in-picture effect. You can also distort a video or photo. For example, you can
creative a sense of perspective by skewing
In Scale mode, you can resize the video by dragging an orange node. Drag the green
nodes to distort the image. For example, you can use distortion to create a sense of
perspective.
78 VideoStudio
To resize/scale a video or photo
1In the Timeline, click a video or photo.
2In the Player panel, click the Resize/Crop drop-down and choose the Scale mode
tool .
3In the preview window, do any of the following:
• Size/Scale: Drag the orange sizing nodes on the corners of the sizing rectangle to
adjust the size. To compress or stretch the video or photo, drag an orange side node.
• Distort: Drag an orange side node to compress or stretch the video or photo or drag a
green node to skew the video or photo.
Time remapping
Play with speed with easy-to-use controls that let you add slow motion or high speed effects,
freeze the action, or reverse and replay scenes in your video. All the tools you need for speed
effects have been consolidated in one place.
The Time Remapping dialog box includes familiar playback and trim controls, as well as a
thumbnail area that displays each change made with the speed controls.
The Time Remapping dialog box
Edit media 79
To change the playback speed, freeze, or reverse video footage
1In the Timeline view (Edit workspace), right-click the clip you want to work with, and
choose Time Remapping from the context menu.
2In the Time Remapping window, scrub through the video to figure out where you want
to change the speed of playback, reverse the action, or add one or more freeze frames.
3Click the Play button or drag the scrubber to the position you want, and click the
Mark In button and Mark Out button to choose a segment of the clip that you
want to work with. A white line indicates a marked segment of the clip.
Note: The playback controls let you navigate the original version of the clip (even if it is
trimmed in the Timeline).
4Do any of the following:
• Click the Speed button , and drag the slider to set the speed for the selected
segment. Dragging to the right increases the speed; dragging to the left slows the
speed.
If you want to gradually apply the speed change, you can mark the Ease in and Ease
out check boxes.
Note: The audio is removed when you change the speed of a clip.
• Click the Reverse button , and type a repetition value in the time(s).
5To freeze a frame, click any point along the timeline that doesn’t have a white line
(cannot freeze a frame in a section that has been reversed or has had the speed
changed), click the Freeze Frame button , and type the number of seconds for the
frame duration.
6To verify the changes you’ve applied, review the thumbnails that appear below the
playback controls. An icon in the upper left corner of the thumbnails indicates which type
of speed control has been applied (note that speed change uses different icons—a turtle
to indicate slow motion; a rabbit to indicate faster speed).
Click the Play the time remapping result button to play the result.
If you want to remove a segment or freeze a frame, click the corresponding thumbnail,
and click the Remove selected clips button
7Click OK to return to the Edit workspace.
80 VideoStudio
Modifying video playback speed
You can modify the playback speed of your videos. Set your video in slow motion to
emphasize a movement, or set it to play at lightning speed and give your movie a comical
air. You can also use this feature to achieve time-lapse and strobe effects on your videos and
photos.
You can also make quick and basic speed adjustments in the Time Remapping dialog box.
For more information, see
To adjust the speed and time-lapse attributes of your video clip
1In the Timeline, select a video clip.
2In the Options panel, click Speed/Time-lapse on the Edit tab.
3In New clip duration, specify a set duration for your video clip.
Note: If you want to maintain the original duration of your clip, do not change the
original value.
4In Frame Frequency, specify the number of frames to be removed at regular intervals
during video playback.
Note: A higher value entered in Frame Frequency will produce a more noticeable time-
lapse effect on your video. Otherwise, maintain the value at 0 to retain all frames in your
video clip.
5Drag the Speed slider according to your preferences (i.e., slow, normal or fast), or enter a
value.
Note: The higher the value you set, the faster the playback of your clip. (Values range
from 10-1000%).
6Click Preview to view the results of your settings.
7Click OK.
Edit media 81
To apply Time-lapse/Strobe effects on your photos
1Click File > Insert Media File to Timeline > Insert Photo for Time-lapse/Strobe.
2Browse for the photos you want to include in your project and click Open.
Note: It is recommended to choose a series of photos taken in succession with your
DSLR.
3Specify the number of frames to be retained and removed in Keep and Drop.
Note: For example, you enter a value of 1 in Keep and 3 in Drop. This means that it will
follow the interval to retain one frame and remove three frames for the set of photos
selected.
4In Frame duration, specify the exposure time for each frame.
5Use the playback controls to preview the effect of the frame settings on your photos.
6Click OK.
If the value of Frame Frequency is more than 1 and clip duration is the same, Strobe
effect will be produced. If the value of Frame Frequency is more than 1 and clip
duration is shortened, Time-lapse effect will be produced.
Hold [Shift] then drag the end of the clip on the Timeline to change the playback
speed.
82 VideoStudio
The black arrow means you are trimming or extending the clip, while the white arrow
means that you are changing the playback speed.
To adjust the variable speed attributes of your video clip
1In the Timeline, select a video clip.
2In the Options panel, click Variable Speed on the Edit tab.
3Drag the Scrubber to the points where you want to add key frames.
4Click Add key frame to set the frame as a key frame in the clip. You can change the
playback speed at each key frame.
5To increase or decrease the speed, click the buttons or enter a value in Speed.
You can also drag the slider from Slow to Normal or Fast.
6Click the Play button to preview the effect.
7Click OK when finished.
You can add variety to your project by modifying the playback speed of a clip at
different intervals.
Setting the variable speed removes the audio of the video clip.
To reverse video playback
• Click Reverse video in the Options Panel.
Using Freeze Frame
You can use Freeze Frame to showcase a specific frame in your video by extending the length
of time that frame displays. For example, you can use Freeze Frame to showcase the video
frame where a goal is scored in a sporting event or use it to showcase a smile or reaction
that you’ve captured.
Edit media 83
When you apply Freeze Frame to a video clip, the clip is automatically split at the freeze point
and the frame you choose is inserted as an image file (BMP) and displayed onscreen for the
duration that you set.
To apply Freeze Frame
1In the Timeline, select the video clip that has a frame you want to freeze.
2Scrub to the frame you want to use. The selected frame displays in the Preview window.
Note: The Previous and Next buttons in the Navigation panel let you navigate a clip
frame-by-frame to find the frame you want.
3Click Edit menu > Freeze Frame.
4In the Freeze Frame dialog box, set the Duration.
Note: If you want to suspend audio on other tracks during the freeze, enable the Split
Audio check box. This splits and suspends all audio-related tracks (voice, music, video
overlays) for the duration of the freeze.
5Click OK.
Replacing media clips
Media clips in the Timeline can be replaced in their current position. When you replace a
clip, the attributes of the original clip are applied to the new clip.
84 VideoStudio
To replace a clip
1In the Timeline, right-click the media clips you want to replace.
2Choose Replace clip from the right-click menu.
The Replace/relink clip dialog box appears.
3Browse for the replacement media clips and click Open.
The clip in the Timeline is automatically replaced.
The duration of the replacement clip must be equal to or longer than the duration of
the original clip.
Hold [Shift] and click multiple clips to select two or more clips in the Timeline and
repeat the process for replacing multiple clips. The number of replacement clips must
match the number of clips that you selected in the Timeline.
You can also drag a video clip from the Library to the Timeline and hold the [Ctrl] key
to automatically snap on a clip to be replaced.
Trimming a clip
The best part of editing your movie on your computer is the ease with which you can split
and trim your clips with frame accuracy.
To split a clip into two
1In Storyboard View or Timeline View, select the clip you want to split.
2Drag the Scrubber to the point where you want to split the clip.
Note: Click or to set the cutting point more precisely.
3Click to split the clip into two clips. To remove one of these clips, select the unwanted
clip and press [Delete].
To trim a clip with the Trim markers using Single Clip Trimmer
1In the Library, right-click on a video clip and choose Single Clip Trim to launch the
Single Clip Trim dialog box.
2Click and drag the Trim markers to set the Mark-in/Mark-out points on the clip.
3For more precise trimming, click on a Trim marker, hold it, and use the left or right arrow
keys on your keyboard to trim one frame at a time. The Mark-in/Mark-out points can
also be set by pressing [F3] and [F4], respectively.
Edit media 85
4To preview the trimmed clip only, press [Shift + Space] or hold [Shift] and click the Play
button.
Note: You can also use zoom controls to display each frame of your video on the
Timeline and trim one frame at a time. The Scroll Bar makes navigating through your
project quicker and easier. A wheel mouse can also be used to scroll, and to zoom by
pressing [Ctrl].
To trim a clip directly on the Timeline
1In the Timeline, select a clip.
2Drag the Trim markers on either side of the clip to change its length. The Preview
Window reflects the position of the Trim marker in the clip.
Note: Instant timecode tip is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to add clips with a
specific timecode. It appears while trimming and inserting overlapping clips on the
Timeline, enabling you to make adjustments based on the timecode shown. For example,
the instant timecode tip appears with the format 00:00:17.05 (03:00 - 00). 00:00:17.05
indicates the current timecode where the selected clip is located. The (03:00 - 00) start-
end range represents the duration of one overlapping clip with the previous clip and
another overlapping with the next clip.
To trim a clip using the Duration box
1In the Timeline, select a clip.
2In the Options panel, click the timecode in the Duration box on the Edit tab.
3Enter the desired clip length.
Trim markers Mark-in/
Mark-out
86 VideoStudio
Note: Changes made in the video Duration box only affect the Mark-out point. The
Mark-in point remains unchanged.
Using Slip, Slide, Roll, or Stretch tools on the Timeline
You can adjust a clip in the Timeline in a number of different ways—especially if you are using
trimmed clips. Trimmed clips have hidden head frames (frames trimmed from the beginning
of a clip) and tail frames (frames trimmed from the end of a clip).
It’s helpful to think of the clips in the Timeline as consisting of two elements: a window (the
duration for a clip, defined by the start and end points for each clip that you see on the
Timeline), and the content (all the frames included in the full, pre-trimmed clip, whether they
are hidden by a trim action or not).
The Player panel lets you see the Mark In/Mark Out points for a trimmed clip and see
if there are head frames and/or tail frames for the clip.
The following tools let you adjust clips on the Timeline.
•Slip: Lets you drag in the Timeline to change what frames you see (content) without
affecting the “window” (duration) for the clip, essentially moving the trim markers for the
source clip.
•Slide: Lets you move the clip “window” along the timeline without changing duration,
essentially moving the trim markers in the Timeline to reveal different content.
•Roll: Lets you adjust the length of the clip “window”, affecting the duration of the
selected clip and the adjacent clip.
•Stretch: Lets you adjust the size of the clip “window”, thus changing the duration on the
Timeline, expanding or contracting the content (adjusting the speed) in order to fit the
new duration without changing which frames are shown.
The full pre-trimmed length of the clip determines the limits for your adjustments. For some
changes, the pre-trimmed length of the adjacent clip is also a limiting factor. For example, if
you use the Roll tool to decrease the Timeline duration of a selected clip, the Roll tool will
stop at the point where the adjacent clip (which is increasing in duration) has run out of
frames.
head frames tail frames
Edit media 87
To use the Slip tool to adjust clips in the Timeline
1In the Timeline, select a trimmed clip.
2On the Timeline toolbar, click the Slip tool .
3With your pointer over the clip, drag in the Timeline to change which frames display in
the Timeline.
The Player panel displays the clip with the trim markers to help you see how the new
position affects where the Mark In/Out points appear.
To use the Stretch tool to adjust clips in the Timeline
1In the Timeline, select a clip that is part of a sequence.
2On the Timeline toolbar, click the Stretch tool .
3In the Timeline, drag an edge of the selected clip to change the duration.
Although the content of the selected clip remains the same, the speed changes to fit the
new duration.
To use the Roll tool to adjust clips in the Timeline
1In the Timeline, select a trimmed clip that is part of a sequence.
2On the Timeline toolbar, click the Roll tool .
3In the Timeline, drag an edge of the selected clip to change the duration of the clip.
The duration of the adjacent clip is also affected.
To use the Slide tool to adjust clips in the Timeline
1In the Timeline, select a trimmed clip that is part of a sequence.
2On the Timeline toolbar, click the Slide tool .
3Drag in the Timeline to adjust the position of the clip and to change which frames are
displayed.
The duration of the selected clip is not affected, but the duration of adjacent clips is
affected.
Note: A gap can result if the adjacent clip is not long enough to fill the area left by the
moved clip.
Using Split by Scene
Use the Split by Scene feature in the Edit workspace to detect different scenes in a video file
and automatically break it down into several clip files.
88 VideoStudio
The way VideoStudio detects scenes depends on the type of video file. In a captured DV AVI
file, scenes can be detected in two ways:
•DV Recording Time Scan detects scenes according to their shooting date and time.
•Frame Content detects content changes, such as motion change, camera shifting,
brightness change, etc., and splits them into separate files.
In an MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file, scenes can only be detected based on content changes (i.e.,
by Frame Content).
To use Split by Scene on a DV AVI or MPEG file
1In the Edit workspace, select a captured DV AVI file or an MPEG file on the Timeline.
2In the Options panel, click the Edit tab, and click the Split by Scene button . This will
open the Scenes dialog box.
3Choose your preferred scan method (DV Recording Time Scan or Frame Content).
4Click Options. In the Scene Scanning Sensitivity dialog box, drag the slider to set the
Sensitivity level. A higher value means more precision in the scene detection.
5Click OK.
6Click Scan. VideoStudio then scans through the video file and lists all the detected
scenes.
You may merge some of the detected scenes into a single clip. Simply select all the
scenes that you want to join together then click Join. The plus sign (+) and a number
indicates how many scenes are merged into that particular clip. Click Split to undo any
Join actions that you have done.
7Click OK to split the video.
Trimming video into multiple clips
The Multi-trim Video feature is another method for breaking down a clip into multiple
segments. While Split by Scene is automatically done by the program, Multi-trim Video gives
you complete control over the clips you wish to extract, making it even easier to include only
the scenes you want.
Edit media 89
To trim a video file into multiple clips
1In the Timeline of the Edit workspace, select the clip that you want to trim.
2Double click the clip to open the Options panel.
3On the Edit tab, click Multi-Trim Video.
4View the whole clip first by clicking Play to determine how you want to mark segments
in the Multi-Trim Video dialog box.
5Choose the number of frames to display by dragging the Timeline zoom. You can
choose to display the smallest subdivision of one frame per second.
6Drag the Scrubber until you get to the part of the video that you want to use as the
beginning frame of the first segment. Click Set Mark-in button .
7Drag the Scrubber again, this time, to the point where you want the segment to end.
Click Set Mark-out button .
Part Description
1 — Timeline zoom Drag up and down to sub-divide a video clip into frames per
second.
2 — AccuCut Timeline Scan a video clip frame by frame for accurate mark-in and mark-
out positions.
3 — Playback Speed Control Preview the clip at different playback speeds.
4 — Jog Wheel Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.
12 3 4
90 VideoStudio
8Do steps 4 and 5 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want keep or
remove.
Note: To mark segments in and out, you can press [F3] and [F4] while playing the video.
You can also click the Invert Selection button or press [Alt+I] to toggle between
marking segments that you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out
from the clip.
Quick search interval allows you to set a fixed interval between frames and browse
through the movie using the set value.
9Click OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted onto the
Timeline.
Saving trimmed clips
Frequently, when you make changes (i.e., after auto-splitting clips using Split by Scene,
extracting clips using Multi-trim Video, or manually trimming clips), you may wish to make a
permanent change to the clip and save the edited file. VideoStudio gives you a margin of
safety since it saves the trimmed video to a new file and does not alter the original file.
To save a trimmed clip
1In the Storyboard View, Timeline View, or the Library, select a trimmed clip.
2Click File > Save Trimmed Video.
Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box
Reverses or advances through the video in fixed increments. By default,
these buttons move up or down through the video in increments of 15
seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.
Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to play only the selected
segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed segment.
Moves to the previous/next frame in the video.
Repeats playback of video
Edit media 91
Taking a snapshot from a video clip
You can take a photo snapshot in the Edit workspace by selecting a specific frame on the
Timeline and saving it as an image file. You can change the default file format and quality
settings for snapshots.
To capture photos in the Edit workspace
1In the Timeline, select a video clip in your project.
2Drag the Scrubber to the frame you want to capture.
3Click Edit > Take a Snapshot. The photo snapshot is automatically added to the Library
and saved to your working folder.
To change default Snapshot settings
1Click Settings > Preferences > Capture.
Choose Bitmap or JPEG as the Snapshot format.
Note: If you select JPEG, set the Snapshot quality.
2Click OK.
Lens Correction
Wide-angle lenses, often used in video action cameras, are great for capturing a wide scene,
but they cause distortion in the video footage. Lens Correction has presets (for some GoPro
cameras, for example) and manual controls that let you reduce distortion.
Distortion (left) can be reduced (right) by using Lens Correction.
92 VideoStudio
To correct wide-angle lens distortion
1In the Timeline, double-click a clip with lens distortion, and in the Options panel, click
the Lens Correction tab.
2In the Select preset drop-list at the top, choose a preset.
The preview of the correction applies to the entire clip.
Advanced users can manually adjust the settings to correct distortion.
Note: To reset the clip to the original settings, choose Default from the Select preset
drop-list.
Edit media 93
Pan and zoom for video and photos
You can apply a pan and zoom effect to your photos and video clips. For example, you can
choose to start playing a video clip with a the full frame in view, and gradually zoom in to
show a specific subject in the video, then pan to show other subjects in the video. Conversely,
you can start with a close-up of a subject in your video, and gradually zoom out to show the
full scene. You can also create a static zoom that does not change as the video plays. For
example, a static zoom can be applied to draw attention to the main action in a video that
was originally set to capture a wide area, for example, a scene captured with a tripod.
Pan and Zoom is a great tool to use with 4K video because you can pan and zoom across
your 4K video source and still get an HD result.
Whether it’s a quick pan and zoom effect, or a customized result that requires key frame
precision, the Pan and Zoom window provides you with the tools you need.
There are three editing modes for Pan and Zoom:
•Static: Maintains the zoom level that you set throughout the video.
•Animated: Lets you use crosshairs to adjust pan and zoom key frames precisely.
•On the Fly: Lets you adjust pan and zoom settings interactively while the video plays.
Pan and Zoom: Settings and controls
The following settings and controls are available in the Pan and Zoom window. The
availability of controls depends on what is currently selected and the Edit Mode you choose.
For information about common key frame, playback, and preview controls, see “Customizing
filters” on page 149.
•Edit Mode: Choose between the Static, Animated or On the Fly editing modes.
•Preset Size: Choose a preset for HD, 2K, 4K, and more.
•Stay within source boundary: Ensures that the boundary of the project is used as the
boundary for the pan and zoom effect (the effect will not extend beyond project edge).
•Position: A one-click way to position the marquee in one of nine common alignment
options.
94 VideoStudio
•Ease in: Starts slower and gradually brings the pan and zoom effect up to full video
speed.
•Grid lines: Displays a grid that helps you align the marquee.
•Grid size: Specifies grid line spacing according to the number of divisions you set.
•Snap to grid: Aligns marquee to closest grid line automatically.
•Background color: Specifies the color of the background if marquee extends beyond
the boundary of the media.
•Vertical: Specifies the y-axis position (top to bottom).
•Horizontal: Specifies the x-axis position (left to right).
•Rotation: Specifies the angle of the marquee in degrees.
•Zoom ratio: Specifies the zoom level by adjusting the size of the marquee.
•Transparency: Specifies the opacity of the photo or video at the selected key frame.
To set a constant zoom level for a photo or video
1In the Timeline, select a photo or video clip and click the Pan and Zoom button on
the Timeline toolbar.
The Pan and Zoom window opens.
2In the Edit Mode drop-down, choose Static.
3In the Preset Size drop-down, choose a preset (such as HD if you’re zooming in on a 4K
video), or in the Original pane of the preview window, use the marquee to set the zoom
area and position.
To apply a pan and zoom effect to a video while it plays
1In the Timeline, select a video clip and click the Pan and Zoom button on the
Timeline toolbar.
The Pan and Zoom window opens.
2In the Edit Mode drop-down, choose On the Fly.
3In the Original pane (on the upper left side of the window), adjust the starting size and
position of the marquee. The result displays in the Preview pane on the right.
4Click the Play button.
5As the video plays, reposition and resize the marquee as you want. Key frames are added
automatically for each change you make.
6Fine tune the results by using the key frames and adjusting the settings.
7Click OK to return to the Edit workspace.
Edit media 95
To apply a pan and zoom effect by using key frames
1In the Timeline, select a video clip and click the Pan and Zoom button on the
Timeline toolbar.
The Pan and Zoom window opens.
2In the Edit Mode drop-down, choose Animated.
3Ensure that the Start key frame (first key frame) is selected in the effect timeline (appears
as a red diamond).
If the Start key frame is not selected, click it.
4In the Original pane, click to set the position of the marquee.
A red crosshair displays to represent the currently selected key frame. Use the controls to
set the Zoom ratio and any other settings you want.
5In the effect timeline, click the End key frame (last key frame), and repeat step 4.
6Click the Play button to preview the effect.
7Double-click the timeline to add any additional key frames, and repeat step 4.
8Click OK to apply effect and return to the main workspace.
Working with the Mask Creator (Ultimate)
You can create and edit masks in VideoStudio Ultimate that let you apply an effect to
selected areas. The Mask Creator helps you apply a mask by using a brush or freehand tool,
shape tools, or a text tool. You can also invert a mask to swap the selected and unselected
areas.
In the Mask Creator, a shaded area and a blue bounding box show the mask area.
96 VideoStudio
If you want to create a dynamic mask that moves (instead of a still mask), you can use
keyframes or use Detect movement options to help match the mask to the movement of
the selected object or background. Note that the Edge tolerance settings affect the edge
detection of the mask as it plays. You can choose to detect the movement from frame-to-
frame, from the current position to end of video, and from the current position to a specified
timecode. Video masks require fine-tuning for best results.
A video mask and a special effect (Colored Pen) creates a unique scene.
A text mask can be used with video or images.
Editing options, such as copy, paste, and move, let you customize and fine-tune a video
mask. You can also activate the Move Mask tool to move, resize, or rotate mask elements
interactively.
You can save your mask so that you can use it with other projects. When you exit the Mask
Creator, the mask appears as a mask clip on a track below the corresponding source clip. If
you create a mask for a clip on the Overlay track, the mask appears directly on the overlay
clip. By default, the currently selected clip is applied to the mask, but you can replace it at
anytime by dragging a new clip from the Library to the mask in Replace Mode or by holding
down the Ctrl key while you drag.
Edit media 97
Masks appear in a track below their corresponding clip and can be identified by a mask
icon and an elliptical vignette thumbnail.
Saved masks can be imported to the Mask Frame or Video Mask library (Options panel >
Blending tab > Matte Modes). For more information about using mask frames and video
masks with overlays, see “Adding a mask frame” on page 163 and “Using video masks with
overlay clips” on page 164.
Mask Creator tools and options
You can use the following Masking tools:
•Move Mask — Lets you move the mask to a new position in the frame. You can also
resize or rotate the selected mask element with the Move Mask tool.
•Mask Brush — Lets you draw a freehand mask. Can be adjusted with the Brush size
and Edge tolerance sliders.
•Smart Mask Brush — Lets you draw a freehand mask that uses edge-detection to
make it easier to select distinct objects. Can be adjusted with the Brush size and Edge
tolerance sliders.
•Eraser — Lets you erase the mask. In addition to the Brush size slider, you can use
the Edge tolerance slider.
•Smart Eraser — Lets you erase the mask using edge-detection to make it easier to
select distinct objects. Can be adjusted with the Brush size and Edge tolerance sliders.In
addition to the Brush size slider, you can use the Edge tolerance slider.
• Freehand tool — Lets you draw an outline around the area you want to mask (start
and end points must meet).
• Text Mask — Lets you create a text mask. When active, standard text options display
(font, size, alignment, and formatting options).
•Shape tools — Let you create a mask using shapes. For
video masks, edge-detection adjusts the edges for subsequent frames.
•Clear Mask — Removes the mask completely.
•Brush size slider — Changes the diameter of the Mask Brush and Eraser.
•Edge tolerance slider — Determines the sensitivity for mask edge detection based on
how closely the pixels that you select with the masking tools match the adjacent pixels.
At low settings, only similar pixels are included in the mask; at high settings, the mask
expands to include a wider range of pixels.
You can manage and edit masks with the following Editing tools:
98 VideoStudio
•Show/Hide Mask — Hides or shows the mask highlight and bounding box in the
playback area.
•Copy — Lets you copy a mask from a specific frame
•Paste — Lets you paste a mask that you copied from another frame
•Undo — Removes the last edit
•Redo — Reapplies the last edit if Undo was used
Video masks can use the following Detect movement options:
•Next Frame — Detects movement and adjusts mask from the current scrubber
position to the next frame
•End of Clip — Detects movement and helps to adjust a mask for all frames from the
current scrubber position until the end of the clip. Note: This can take a few minutes,
depending on the length and quality of the clip.
•Specified Timecode — Detects movement and helps to adjust the mask for all
frames from the current scrubber position until the specified timecode. Note: This can
take a few minutes, depending on the length and quality of the clip.
Note: Creating precise video masks requires fine-tuning between frames.
To create a still or keyframed video mask with the Mask Creator
1In the Timeline view (Edit workspace), select a clip on the Video track, and click the
Mask Creator button on the Timeline toolbar.
Note: You can also select a clip in the Overlay track. If you choose this The overlay clip
is used as a reference point for the mask (no relationship to Video track content).
2In the Mask Creator window, choose one of the following: Mask Brush, Smart Mask
Brush, Text Mask, or any of the shape tools (Rectangle, Ellipse...).
3In the playback window, drag, draw, or type to create a mask. The area not selected
appears shaded. Do any of the following:
• To move, resize, or rotate a mask element, in the Masking tools area, click the Move
Mask tool , and in the playback window, click and drag the element to a new
position or use the bounding box handles to adjust the selected mask element.
• To adjust the mask transparency, in the Editing tools area, drag the Transparency
slider (applies to all mask elements)
• To soften the edges of the mask, in the Editing tools area, mark the Feather check box,
and drag the Pixels slider to set the amount of edge feathering (applies to all mask
elements).
• To add more elements to your mask, in the Masking tools area, choose the tool you
want, and drag, draw, or type in the playback window.
Edit media 99
The Heart shape tool was used to create a mask from three hearts. Each heart is a
separate element that can be edited and moved independently. The elements can also
be merged into a single unit.
• To merge mask elements (so you can move, resize, or rotate them as a single unit), in
the Masking tools area, click the Move Mask tool , and in the playback window,
drag over the mask elements that you want to merge. An outline appears around the
selected elements. Right-click and choose Merge All Masks from the context menu.
• To delete one or more mask elements, click the Move Mask tool , and in the
playback window, click the mask element to select it, right-click and choose Delete
from the context menu. Choose Delete All to remove all mask elements.
• To invert the mask, in the Save options area, enable the Invert mask option.
4If you want to add movement to one or more mask elements, click the Move Mask tool
, select a mask element in the playback window, and use the keyframe controls under
the playback window to add keyframes. For each selected keyframe, you can set the size,
position, and rotation of mask elements interactively in the playback window, or you can
change the values in the Keyframe settings area.
5If you want to save the mask, click Save As and type a name for your mask.
6Click OK to exit Mask Creator.
The mask appears on its own track in the Timeline, below the original source clip.
7To change the clip for the mask, drag a clip from the Library to the masked clip while
pressing the CTRL key (or enable Replace Mode before dragging).
Previous keyframe / Next keyframe
Add/Remove keyframe
Scrubber/Playhead
Selected keyframe (red)
Unselected
keyframe (blue)
100 VideoStudio
Adding a red background video in the Video track helps the mask stand out. Adding
keyframes lets the heart shapes move across the screen.
Note: You can adjust the length of the mask as you would other clips and you can apply
effects to the mask by dragging an effect onto the mask in the Timeline.
To create a video mask with the Mask Creator by detecting movement
1In the Timeline view (Edit workspace), select the clip you want to work with, and click the
Mask Creator button on the Timeline toolbar.
2In the Mask Creator window, scrub through the video to figure out when you want the
masking to start and stop. Make note of the timecode for the stop time.
3In the tools area, choose a masking tool.
4In the playback window, drag across the area that you want to select (a subject that you
want to track using Detect movement).The area not selected appears shaded.
5In the Detect movement area, choose Next Frame , End of Clip , or type a
timecode in the timecode box and then click Specified Timecode . Note that when
you detect movement to the end of a clip or to a specified timecode, it can take a few
minutes, depending on the length of the clip and the quality.
6Review the results in the playback window. You can fine-tune by scrubbing through the
video and using the Eraser tool and Brush tool to modify the selected area from frame-
to-frame.
If you want to invert the mask, in the Save options area, click the Invert mask option.
If you want to save the mask as a Video Mask (Options panel, Blending > Matte
Modes > Video Mask), click Save As and type a name for your mask (saved to the .uisx
format).
7Click OK to exit Mask Creator.
Edit media 101
To edit a mask
1In the Timeline view (Edit workspace), select a clip that has a mask, and click the Mask
Creator button on the Timeline toolbar.
The Mask Creator dialog box opens. Make any adjustments you want and click OK to
return to the Timeline.
To save a mask
1After you create a mask, in the Save options area of the Mask Creator dialog box, click
Mask (default) or Invert mask.
Note: If you invert the mask, the preview area does not show the inverted mask—it
displays when you return to the Timeline.
2Set a destination in the Save to box.
3Click the Save As button at the bottom of the dialog box, and choose a name for the
mask.
If you want to link the mask to the original clip, mark the Link mask to source clip check
box. Note that you can link only one mask per file. Linking is particularly helpful for
masks customized to shapes and movement within the source clip.
If you save your mask to the default location, they are added to the Matte Modes drop-
list on the Blending tab of the Options panel.
To remove a mask from a clip
1In the Timeline, select a clip that has a mask.
2In the Options panel, click the Blending tab.
3In the Matte Modes drop-list, choose None.
To import a video or still mask into the Matte Modes library
1In the Timeline, select an overlay clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Blending tab.
3In the Matte Modes drop-list, choose Mask Frame (for a still mask) or Video Mask.
4Click the Add mask item(s) button to the right of the mask preview area, and browse
to a saved mask file (.uisx format for a video mask, .webp for a still mask).
The mask is added to the preview area.
You can remove files from the video masks list by clicking the thumbnail for the mask,
and clicking the Remove mask item button .
102 VideoStudio
You can create a folder for masks in the default user content folder: ...Documents/
Corel VideoStudio Pro/24.0/.
Track transparency
You can use the Track Transparency mode to precisely control the transparency of a track.
Key frames let you vary track transparency to achieve the effect you want. For example, you
can adjust the transparency of a track to create a superimposed effect (where the underlying
track shows through) or to create a custom fade in and fade out effect.
To adjust track transparency
1In the Edit workspace, choose a track in the Timeline that you want to adjust.
2In the track header, click the Track Transparency button .
Track Transparency mode opens.
3Do any of the following
• To adjust the transparency for the entire track, drag the yellow line to a new vertical
position. The top has a value of 100% opacity and ranges to 0% opacity (fully
transparent) at the bottom.
Edit media 103
• To vary the transparency throughout the track, click the yellow line to set a key frame.
You can add as many key frames as you like. Drag the square key frame node to the
transparency level you want.
• To delete a key frame, right-click a key frame node and choose Remove key frame.
• To delete all key frames, right-click a key frame node and choose Remove all key
frames
4To exit Track Transparency mode, click the Close button in the upper-right corner of
the Timeline.
104 VideoStudio
360 video 105
360 video
360 video is an interactive type of video that lets the viewer look in any direction by changing
the viewing angle during playback. The viewing angle can be controlled by using a
touchscreen, onscreen controls, or by moving the viewing device, such as a smartphone or
tablet, in different directions. 360 video requires a special 360 video player (for example,
YouTube and Facebook have 360 video players). 360 video footage can also be converted
to standard video, offering many creative options along the way.
In this section, you’ll learn about:
• Editing 360 video
• Converting 360 video to standard video
• Tiny planet and rabbit hole effects from 360 video
Editing 360 video
VideoStudio lets you edit different types of 360 video footage (check the instructions for
your 360 video camera for more information). For example, you can adjust the color or
brightness of the video, trim the video, or add titles or objects. Please note that not all effects
can be applied to 360 videos.
Note: There are different types of 360 video. VideoStudio supports the following types of
360 video:
• Monoscopic Equirectangular
• Single Fisheye
106 VideoStudio
•Dual Fisheye
You can convert any supported 360 video to Standard, or convert Single Fisheye or Dual
Fisheye to Equirectangular video.
To edit and export a 360 video
1In the Edit workspace, drag a 360 video from the Library to the Timeline.
If you want to convert a fisheye or dual fisheye video to equirectangular, right-click the
clip in the Timeline, choose 360 Video > 360 Video Conversion, and choose the
corresponding option. If you want to adjust any conversion settings, adjust the controls
and click OK.
2In the Timeline, verify that you are working with a 360 video by ensuring that the 360
video icon displays in the Player panel.
3Edit the video in VideoStudio. For example, you can do the following:
• Open the Options panel to access Color settings
• Apply an effect from the Library (*Not all effects can be applied to 360 video.)
• Trim the video
• Add a title or object
Note: When you apply a title or object to a 360 video, right-click the item in the
Timeline, and choose 360 Video > Insert as 360 to convert the media to 360. Make any
adjustments you want in the Insert as 360 window. A circular 360 icon appears on titles
and other objects inserted as 360.
4When you are finished editing, save your file and click the Share tab.
5From the Share tab, ensure that you enable the Same as Project Settings check box or
select a 360-compatible setting (for example, MPEG-4, AVC 360, in the highest resolution
suitable for your project).
6Make any additional changes to the settings on the Sharing page and click Start.
Converting 360 video to standard video
Here are a few reasons people choose to convert 360 video:
• There are occasions when you want to control what users look at in 360 video footage.
When you convert to standard video in VideoStudio, you can use your 360 video source
in much the same way that you can use multicamera sources—you can choose the view
for your audience with key frame precision.
• You can play standard video using a wider range of applications and devices—no special
player is required (the video is not interactive).
• Standard video is a much smaller file size than 360 video.
360 video 107
The 360 to Standard dialog box. The 360 video source displays on the left and a
standard video preview displays on the right
Controls and settings
The following controls and settings can be found in the 360 to Standard and Insert as 360
windows.
• The key frame controls let you modify the key frames on the
timeline, according to the position of the scrubber. You can Add key frame, Remove key
frame, Go to previous key frame, Reverse key frames, Move key frame to the left,
Move key frame to the right, and Go to next key frame).
• The playback bar let you navigate your clip (Home, Previous Frame, Play,
Next Frame, End)
•Timecode lets you jump directly to a part of your selected clip by
specifying the exact timecode.
•Scrubber let you scrub through the clip. Clicking a key frame will move the scrubber
to the current position in the timeline.
•The timeline in the 360 to Standard dialog box is a simple bar with time
indicators. It contains any key frames you set and can be navigated with the scrubber.
You can use the Zoom in and Zoom out buttons to the right of the timeline to expand
or condense the units of time.
•Pan — Lets you adjust the view horizontally (x-axis)
•Tilt — Lets you adjust the view vertically (y-axis)
•Field of View — Lets you adjust the how close or how far away the camera appears to
be from the scene in the selected view—the effect is similar to zooming. Lower values
zoom in for a narrower view; higher values zoom out for a wider view.
108 VideoStudio
To convert 360 video to standard video
1In the Timeline, right-click a 360 video clip, and choose 360 Video > 360 to Standard,
and choose a conversion type.
The corresponding 360 video window opens with two preview panes—the 360 video
source is on the left and a standard video preview is on the right.
2In the 360 video pane, drag the View Tracker icon until its position corresponds to
the view that you want to show in the standard video pane.
3Click Play and as the 360 video plays, drag the View Tracker if you want to change the
view seen in the standard video pane.
Each time you change the view, key frames are added.
Key frames appear as blue diamonds along the timeline. The selected key frame is red.
Key frame buttons (standard key frame controls) appear above the timeline.
4When you are finished, you can replay the video and edit the view by doing any of the
following:
• Delete a key frame by clicking it on the Timeline and pressing Delete.
• Drag a key frame on the timeline to change when the view appears.
• Click a key frame and change the view by adjusting the Pan, Tilt, and Field of View
values in the Angle area.
5Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Timeline.
If you want to clear all key frames, click the Reset button.
6When you want to output your project, ensure that you choose a standard video format.
Tiny planet and rabbit hole effects from 360 video
You can create tiny planet videos and rabbit hole videos from your 360 video footage
(equirectangular or dual fisheye).
When you apply the effect, the video is converted to a standard format, with a square aspect
ratio.
360 video 109
To apply a tiny planet or rabbit hole effect to a 360 video
1In the Timeline, right-click a 360 video that is in the equirectangular format or dual
fisheye, and from the context menu choose 360 Video > 360 Video Conversion >
Equirectangular to Spherical Panorama or Dual Fisheye to Spherical Panorama.
2In the Options area of the editing window, choose one of the following:
• Tiny Planet: Creates a sphere using the bottom edge of the video as the center,
depending on the video content, this often creates a planet-like effect.
• Rabbit Hole: Creates a sphere using the top edge of the video as the center,
depending on the content of the video, this often creates a tunnel effect.
3Use the built-in timeline and scrubber to review the video, adjusting the following
controls at any point (keyframes are added each time you change the settings):
• Zoom: Changes the field of view to zoom in or zoom out of the scene.
• Rotate: Sets the rotation for the video in degrees (-360 to 360).
Note: To delete a keyframe, select it (changes to red), and press Delete. To delete all
keyframes, right-click any keyframe and from the context-menu, choose Delete All.
110 VideoStudio
Audio 111
Audio
Sound is one of the elements that determine the success of your video production.
VideoStudio allows you to add music, narration, and sound effects to your project.
The Audio feature in VideoStudio consists of four tracks. You can insert narrations on the
Voice Track and the background music or sound effects on the Music Track.
This section contains the following topics:
• Adding audio files
• Using Audio Ducking to automatically adjust volume
• Splitting an audio track from a video clip
• Using Auto Music
• Balancing the volume of multiple clips with Normalize Audio
• Adjusting clip volume
• Trimming and cutting audio clips
• Stretching audio duration
• Applying fade-in/out
• Using the Sound Mixer
• Adjusting stereo channels
• Using the Surround Sound Mixer
• Mixing Surround Sound
• Duplicating an audio channel
• Applying audio filters
Adding audio files
You can add audio files to your project in any of the following ways:
• Add audio files to the Library from a local or network drive. (Triple Scoop royalty-free
music is included in the Library).
•Rip audio from CD
• Record a voice-over clip
• Use Auto Music
Note: You can also extract audio from a video file.
112 VideoStudio
To add an audio file to the Library
• In the Library panel, click the Sounds button , Import audio files to browse for
audio files in your computer.
After you import audio files to the Library, you can add them to your project by dragging
them from the Library to the Timeline.
To add voice-over narration
1Move the Scrubber to the section of the video where you want to insert your voice-over.
2In Timeline view, click the Record/Capture Option button and select Voice-over.
The Adjust Volume dialog box appears.
Note: The program prompts you when there is an existing voice-over clip at the current
project cue position. Make sure that a clip is not selected by clicking on an empty area in
the Timeline.
3Speak into the microphone and check if the meter responds accordingly. You can use the
Windows audio mixer to adjust the level of the microphone.
4Click Start and begin speaking into the microphone.
5Press [Esc] or [Space] to end recording.
6The best way to record narrations is to do the recording in 10 to 15-second sessions. This
makes it easier to remove a badly recorded narration and redo it. To remove, just select
the clip on the Timeline and press [Delete].
To import music from an audio CD
1In Timeline view, click the Record/Capture Option button and click Import from
audio CD.
The Rip CD Audio dialog box appears.
2Select the tracks to be imported in the Track List.
3Click Browse and select the destination folder where the imported files will be saved.
4Click Rip to start importing the audio tracks.
Using Audio Ducking to automatically adjust volume
Audio ducking (similar concept to side-chaining) is used to automatically lower the volume
of one track so that you can hear another track better. For example, if you have a video
project that includes music and voiceover, you can use audio ducking to automatically
decrease the music volume when the narrator is speaking. You can adjust the threshold that
triggers “ducking” and you can adjust by how much the volume of the background track will
drop.
Audio 113
To use Audio Ducking
1In the Timeline view (Edit workspace), ensure that the track you want to apply “ducking”
to is below the video, overlay, or voice track that you want to feature.
2Right-click the music track that you want to “duck” and choose Audio Ducking.
3In the Audio Ducking dialog box, adjust the following sliders:
• Ducking Level — determines the volume decrease. Higher numbers indicate lower
volume.
• Sensitivity — determines the volume threshold (read from the track above the selected
track) required for ducking to occur. You will likely need to readjust the Sensitivity slider
to achieve the results you want.
• Attack — determines the time it takes to lower the volume to the Ducking Level
setting after the Sensitivity threshold is met.
• Decay — determines the time it takes to return to the regular clip volume from the
Ducking Level
In these examples, the voiceover is the purple track and the music is the blue track. The
yellow line in each example indicates when and by how much the volume of the music
track is lowered by applying different Sensitivity settings for Audio Ducking: Top = 0,
Middle = 2, and Bottom = 30. In this example, a setting of 2 worked best.
You can tweak Audio Ducking results manually by dragging, adding, or removing key
frame nodes on the yellow volume line.
114 VideoStudio
Splitting an audio track from a video clip
VideoStudio lets you split the audio portion from an existing video clip into an audio track.
Video clips that contain audio display an Audio icon
To split an audio track from a video clip
1Select the video clip.
2Right-click the video clip and select Audio > Split Audio.
• This generates a new audio track.
Once you split an audio track from a video clip, you can apply an audio filter to the
audio track. For more information, see “Applying audio filters” on page 119.
Using Auto Music
The Auto Music feature of VideoStudio lets you easily create high-quality sound tracks from
the ScoreFitter library of royalty-free music. Songs have different variations to help you set
the right feel for your video production.
You can also access ScoreFitter music in the Library by clicking the Scorefitter Music folder.
To add music with Auto Music
1Click the Auto Music button in the Toolbar.
The Auto Music panel opens.
1In the Category list, select the type of music you want.
2In the Song list, select a song.
3In the Version list, select the version of the song.
To listen to your selection, click the Play Selected Song button
Audio 115
1When you find the song you want, click the Add to Timeline button .
Note: Enable Auto Trim to automatically trim the audio clip or cut down to the desired
duration.
Balancing the volume of multiple clips with Normalize Audio
Normalize Audio automatically balances the volume level for a group of selected audio and
video clips. Whether the audio is are barely audible, or loud and clear, Normalize Audio
ensures a consistent volume range across all the clips. The volume levels of the selected clips
are analyzed and the volume level of the clips with lower volumes is raised to be consistent
with the clip that has the highest volume level. For information about adjusting clip volume
manually, see “Adjusting clip volume” on page 115.
To apply Normalize Audio to multiple clips with audio
1In the Edit workspace, select the audio clips that you want to balance.
To select multiple clips, hold Shift and click the clips.
2Right-click a selected clip and choose Normalize Audio.
Adjusting clip volume
There are different ways to control clip volume. Clip volume represents the percentage of
the original recorded volume. Values range from 0 to 500%, where 0% completely silences
the clip and 100% retains the original recorded volume.
To adjust the volume of a video or audio clip
1In the Timeline, select an audio clip (or video with sound).
2Do one of the following:
• Right-click the clip, choose Adjust Volume from the context menu, and enter a new
value in the volume box.
• Click the Sound Mixer button on the Timeline toolbar, and in the Options panel,
adjust the volume slider.
Trimming and cutting audio clips
After recording voice and music, you can easily trim your audio clips in the Timeline.
To trim audio clips
• Do one of the following:
116 VideoStudio
• Drag a handle, either from the beginning or end, to shorten a clip.
Note: In the Timeline, a selected audio clip has two handles that can be used for
trimming.
• Drag the Trim markers.
• Move the Scrubber and click the Mark-in / Mark-out buttons.
To split the audio clip
• Click the Split Clip button to split the clip.
Stretching audio duration
The time stretch feature allows you to stretch an audio clip to match video duration without
distorting its pitch. Normally, stretching audio clips to fit the project results in a distorted
sound. The time stretch feature will make the audio clip sound like it is just played in a slower
tempo.
When you stretch an audio clip by 50-150%, the sound will not be distorted however, if
stretched below or above that range the sound may be distorted.
To stretch the duration of an audio clip
1Click on an audio clip in the Timeline or Library and open the Options Panel.
2In the Music & Voice tab panel, click Speed/Time-lapse to open the Speed/Time-lapse
dialog box.
3Enter a value in Speed or drag the slider to change the speed of the audio clip. A slower
speed makes the clip’s duration longer while a faster speed makes it shorter.
Note: You can specify how long the clip will play in Time stretch duration. The speed of
the clip will automatically adjust to the specified duration. This feature will not trim the
clip when you specify a shorter time.
Audio 117
You can stretch the time of an audio clip on the Timeline by holding [Shift] then
dragging the handles on the selected clip.
Applying fade-in/out
Background music that starts and ends gradually is commonly used to create smooth
transitions.
To apply fade effects to your audio clips
• Click the Fade-in and Fade-out buttons.
Using the Sound Mixer
The key to making narrations, background music, and existing audio of your video clips
blend well together is to control the relative volume of your clips.
To blend the different audio tracks in your project
• Click the Sound Mixer button on the Toolbar.
Note: If the Audio Type is set to 3/2 in the Project Properties Audio Settings, the
Surround Sound Mixer is displayed. If the Audio Type is set to 2/0 Stereo mode, the 2-
Channel Mixer is displayed. You can verify these settings by going to Settings > Project
Properties, clicking Edit in the Project Properties dialog box, and then clicking the
Compression tab in the Edit Profile Options dialog box.
For information about using the Surround Sound Mixer, see “Using the Surround Sound
Mixer” on page 118.
For information about using the 2-Channel Mixer, see “Adjusting stereo channels” on
page 117.
Adjusting stereo channels
In stereo files (two channels), a single waveform represents the left and right channels.
To use stereo mode
1Go to Settings > Project Properties.
2In the Project Properties dialog box, choose a format from the Project format drop-list.
3Click Edit.
118 VideoStudio
4In the Edit Profile Options dialog box, click the Compression tab.
5In the Audio format drop-list, choose Dolby Digital Audio.
6In the Audio Settings area, choose 2/0 (L, R) from the Audio Type drop-list box.
7Click the Sound Mixer button in the toolbar.
8Click on the Music Track.
9Click Play in the Options Panel.
10 Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer and adjust
depending on your preferred sound position.
Note: Moving the note symbol will affect the sound coming from your preferred
direction.
11 Drag Volume to adjust the volume level of the audio.
Using the Surround Sound Mixer
Unlike a stereo stream that carries only two audio channels, Surround Sound has five
separate audio channels encoded into one file which is delivered to five speakers and one
sub-woofer.
The Surround Sound Mixer has all the controls to position sounds around the listener,
outputting audio through the 5.1 configuration of multiple speakers. You can also use this
mixer to adjust the volume for stereo files, making it sound as if the audio moves from one
speaker to another.
Mixing Surround Sound
All audio channels in Surround Sound have a set of similar controls that you will find in the
stereo configuration of this panel, plus a few more specific controls.
•Six-channel VU Meter — Front Left, Front Right, Center, Sub-woofer, Surround Left,
Surround Right.
•Center — Controls the amount of output sound from the center speaker.
•Sub-woofer — Controls the amount of low-frequency sound output.
To use Surround Sound mode
1Go to Settings > Project Properties.
Audio 119
2In the Project Properties dialog box, choose a format from the Project format drop-list.
3Click Edit.
4In the Edit Profile Options dialog box, click the Compression tab.
5In the Audio format drop-list, choose Dolby Digital Audio.
6In the Audio Settings area, choose 3/2 (L, C, R, SL, SR) from the Audio Type drop-list
box.
7Click the Sound Mixer button in the toolbar.
8Click the music note symbol in the center of the Surround Sound Mixer. Drag it to any of
the six channels depending on your sound position preference. Repeat steps 1 and 2 in
using stereo mode.
9Drag the Volume, Center and Sub-woofer sliders to adjust sound controls of your audio
Note: You can also adjust the sound position preference of your tracks in Video,
Overlay and Voice. To do this, click your preferred track button and repeat steps 2 to 3.
Duplicating an audio channel
Audio files sometimes separate the vocal sound from the background audio and put them
in different channels. Duplicating an audio channel allows you to mute the other channel.
To duplicate an audio channel, click the Sound Mixer button in the toolbar. Click the
Attribute tab and select Duplicate audio channel. Choose which audio channel to duplicate
this may be Left or Right.
In recording voice-overs using the microphone, it will be recorded on one channel only.
You can improve the audio volume by using this feature to duplicate across channels.
Applying audio filters
VideoStudio allows you to apply filters to your audio clips in the Music and Voice Tracks.
You can also apply audio filters to video clips that include audio.
To apply audio filters
1In the Library, click the Filter button to display the filters.
2Click the Show Audio Filters button to display only the audio filters.
120 VideoStudio
3Drag the audio filter to the Timeline and drop it onto an audio clip or a video clip that
includes audio.
You can also apply an audio filter from the Options panel when an audio clip is
selected. In the Music & Voice tab of the Options panel, click Audio Filter. In the
Available filters list, select the desired audio filters and click Add. An audio filter can
be customized if the Options button is enabled. Click Options to open a dialog box
where you can define the settings for the particular audio filter.
Titles and subtitles 121
Titles and subtitles
VideoStudio lets you create professional-looking titles, complete with special effects, in
minutes. For example, you can add opening and closing credits, captions, or subtitles.
This section contains the following topics:
• Adding titles using the Library
• Adding titles with the Subtitle Editor
•Formatting text
• Creating titles for the Library
• Applying text effects and animation
• Converting titles to image and animation files
Adding titles using the Library
You can add titles when the Title category is active in the Library. You can add one or more
custom titles or use presets to add animated titles, such as rolling credits at the end of your
movie. You can also save custom presets.
To add a title
1In the Timeline, drag the Scrubber to the position you want.
2Click the Title button in the Library panel.
3You can double-click in the Preview Window and start typing, but the easiest way to get
a professional-looking title, is to drag one of the title thumbnails from the Library to the
Title track in the Timeline.
4You can drag the title to any position in the Title track and adjust the duration of the title
by dragging the end handles of the clip.
122 VideoStudio
5To edit the title text, double-click the title clip in the Timeline, drag across the text in the
Preview Window, and type new text.
6On the Text Settings page of the Options panel, click the Font button, and use any of
the controls to format your title text. For example, you can align the text and change the
font, size, and color.
If you want to use preset font styles, click the Styles button and choose an option.
Title clips can be placed on Title, Video, and Overlay tracks.
To add a preset title to your project
1Click Title in the Library panel.
2Drag and drop the preset title onto the Title Track in the Timeline.
3Double-click the text in the Preview Window, drag across the placeholder text to
highlight it, and type the text you want.
To save your title as a My Favorite preset
• Right-click a title clip in the Timeline and click Add to My Favorites. You can access your
title preset in the Library by choosing My Favorites in the Gallery drop-list.
If you want to save specific filter customizations for your title, in the Options panel, click
the Attribute tab, and after customizing the filter settings, click the Add to My Favorites
button to the right of the filter list.
Titles and subtitles 123
Adding titles with the Subtitle Editor
The Subtitle Editor lets you add titles to video or audio clips. Easily add on-screen narration
to slideshows or song lyrics to music videos. Use timecodes to match subtitles to clips
precisely when adding subtitles manually. You can also add subtitles automatically using
Voice Detection for more accurate results in less time.
To launch the Subtitle Editor
1Select a video or audio clip in the Timeline.
2On the toolbar, click the Subtitle Editor button .
The Subtitle Editor dialog box appears.
You can also launch the Subtitle Editor dialog box by right-clicking a selected video or
audio clip in the Timeline and choosing Subtitle Editor.
To add subtitles manually with the Subtitle Editor
1In the Subtitle Editor dialog box, drag the Scrubber or play the video to the part where
you want to add titles.
2Using the playback controls or manual scrubbing, click the Mark in and Mark out
buttons to define the duration of each subtitle.
Each subtitle segment manually added will appear in the Subtitle list.
Note: You can also click the Add a new subtitle button to add a subtitle segment on
the current location of the scrubber. If you click this button while the scrubber is on an
124 VideoStudio
existing subtitle segment, the program will seamlessly create an end point of the existing
subtitle segment and the start point of a new subtitle segment.
Click the Waveform view button to display the audio waveform of the video clip.
This is helpful in determining areas that have significant audio levels.
To add subtitles automatically with the Subtitle Editor
1In the Voice Detection area, select settings in the Voice recording quality and
Sensitivity drop-lists that correspond to the characteristics of the audio quality in your
video.
2Click Scan.
The program will automatically detect subtitling segments based on audio levels.
The subtitle segments are added to the Subtitle list.
Note: Voice Detection will be activated only if your video clip has audio.
For better voice detection results, it is best to use videos with clear speech and less
background noise. This feature works best for video tutorials, speeches and video
presentations.
To import subtitle files using the Subtitle Editor
1Click the Import subtitle file button and browse for subtitle files that you want to
import.
2Click Open.
The selected subtitles appear in the Subtitle list.
All subtitle segments previously added manually or automatically, along with its
properties, will be replaced by the selected subtitle files.
To edit subtitles by using the Subtitle Editor
1For each subtitle in the Subtitle list, click the default text to activate the text box and type
the text you want. Click outside the text box when you finish editing the text.
Repeat this step for all subtitle segments.
Titles and subtitles 125
2You can further customize titles in your project by using the following options:
3Click OK.
All segments in the Subtitle list will appear on the Title Track in the Timeline.
To save subtitle files using the Subtitle Editor
1Click the Export subtitle file button and browse for the path where you want to save
the subtitle file.
2Click Save.
Formatting text
You can format your text by changing the font, text alignment, and text direction. For
example, the text direction can be set for left-to-right, right-to-left or vertical. You can also
add borders and shadows, or rotate the text. Add a text backdrop to superimpose your text
on a solid or gradient shape to make it stand out. You can also define how long a title clip
appears by adjusting the title clip duration.
Text direction is one of many formatting settings for titles.
Part Description
Delete selected subtitles — Deletes the selected subtitle segment
Join subtitles — Merges two or more selected subtitles
Time offset — Introduces timing offsets for the entry and exit of subtitle segments
Text Options — Launches a separate dialog box where you can customize the font
attributes, style and position of subtitles
126 VideoStudio
To edit titles
1In the Timeline, select a title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window to
enable title editing.
2In the Options panel, click any of the following buttons on the Text Settings page to
access title editing options:
• Font
• Styles
• Border
• Shadow
• Backdrop
• Motion
• Effect
If you plan to change the text direction, it’s best to set this before you start to type.
To rotate text in the Preview Window
1In the Title Track, double-click a title.
2In the Preview Window, yellow and purple handles appear around the text.
3Click and drag a purple handle to the position you want.
You can also rotate text using the Options Panel. In the Edit tab, specify a value in
Rotate by degree to apply a more precise angle of rotation.
Titles and subtitles 127
To add a text backdrop
1In the Timeline, select a title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window to
enable title editing.
2On the Text Settings page of the Options panel, click the Backdrop button.
3Choose the Solid background bar or Fit with text option.
If you choose Fit with text, choose a shape from the drop-list and set a value in the
Enlarge box.
4In the Color setting area, choose the Solid or Gradient option, and click the color
swatch to set the background color.
5If you choose Gradient, click an arrow button to set the direction of the gradient and
click the second color swatch to set a second color.
6In the Transparency box, enter a value. Higher numbers increase the transparency.
To modify text border and transparency
1In the Timeline, select a title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window to
enable title editing.
2On the Text Settings page of the Options panel, click the Border button.
3Modify any of the following settings:
• Transparent Text: Unmark the check box to fill your text with color. If the check box is
marked, there will be no fill (transparent).
• Outer Stroke Border: Mark to add border width to the outer edge of the text.
• Border Width: Specifies the width of the Outer Stroke Border.
• Line Color: Specifies border color.
• Text Transparency: Higher values increase the transparency of the text; for opaque
text, enter a value of 0.
• Soft Edge: Higher values increase the softness of the text border.
To modify text shadow or glow
1In the Timeline, select a title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window to
enable title editing.
2On the Text Settings page of the Options panel, click the Shadow button.
3Click the corresponding icon for any of the following and modify the settings you want:
128 VideoStudio
• None: No shadow or glow
• Drop shadow: Lets you specify the position, color, transparency, and edge softness for
a text drop shadow.
• Glow shadow: Lets you specify the intensity, color, transparency, and edge softness for
glow effect around the text.
• Extrude shadow: Lets you specify the position (illusion of depth) and color of the
extrusion effect.
To modify text motion (text animation and fade)
1In the Timeline, select a title clip on the Title Track and click the Preview Window to
enable title editing.
2On the Text Settings page of the Options panel, click the Motion button.
3Ensure the check box to the left of the Apply button is marked.
4From the drop-list, choose the type of motion that you want to apply.
5Click the thumbnail for the preset motion you want to apply.
6If you want to modify the preset, adjust any of the settings to the right of the preset
thumbnails.
To apply a title preset
1Click the Title clip on the Timeline and then double-click the title on the Preview
Window.
2In the Edit tab, click the Title Preset Style drop-list and click a thumbnail to apply the
effect.
To adjust the duration of title clips
• Do one of the following:
• In the Timeline, drag the handles of the clip
• Select the clip in the Timeline, open the Options Panel, click the Edit tab, and enter a
value in the Duration box.
Creating titles for the Library
You can create titles that include text, graphic elements, and motion, and save them as title
templates (presets) in the Library.
Titles and subtitles 129
This custom title template includes editable text and a balloon logo that floats away
(Customize Motion).
Before you start
• Import any custom graphic elements to the Library, such as logos, graphics, or lines.
PNG format is usually preferred because it supports transparency.
• If you want to apply motion to non-text elements, it’s best to add the elements to an
overlay track and add motion before adding them to the title text.
To create a title template
1Add a title to your project. The title should appear in the Title Track of the Timeline.
2Drag any additional graphics you want to add from the Library to the title.
A number appears in the upper-right corner of the title template to indicate how many
objects are in the group.
Note: If you want to edit an object, add it to an overlay track first, make the edits you
want (attributes such as color, custom motion, etc...). You can then drag the object from
the overlay track to the title.
3To select individual objects in the group, in the Timeline, click the number in the upper-
right corner of the title group. The object will be selected in the Player panel and you can
adjust the size or position.
4To save the title template to the Library, in the Title track, right-click the title and choose
Merge and save as template > Custom, or choose Add Folder and type a name. The
title is added to the Title category of the Library, within the assigned folder. To rename
the title, select it in the Library, click the label for the thumbnail, and type a new name.
130 VideoStudio
Only one element of the title template can use custom motion.
Applying text effects and animation
Apply motion to your text using title animation tools, such as Fade, Moving Path, and Drop.
You can also apply filters to your text using preset Title Effects such as Bubble, Mosaic, and
Ripple. The title filters are in a separate Title Effects category.
To apply animation to the current text
1In the Title Track, double-click a title.
2In the Options panel, click the Attribute tab.
3Enable the Animation option, and mark the Apply check box.
4Select a category from the Select the type of animation drop-list and select the specific
preset animation from the box under Apply.
5Click the Customize animation attributes button to open a dialog box where you
can specify animation attributes.
6In some animation effects, you can drag the Pause duration handles that appear in the
Navigation area of the Player panel to specify how long the text will pause after it enters
and before it exits the screen.
Pause duration handles
To apply title filters to the current text
1In the Library, click Filter and choose Title Effects in the Gallery drop-list. The Library
displays the thumbnails of various filters under the Title Effects category.
2Drag the filter thumbnail from the Library onto your clip in the Timeline.
Note: By default, the filter applied to a clip is always replaced with the new filter
dragged onto the clip. In the Effect tab of the Options Panel, clear Replace last filter to
apply multiple filters to a single title.
3To customize the title filter, in the Options panel, click the Effect button, and do one of
the following:
• Click a thumbnail in the drop-list to the left of Customize Filter.
• Click Customize Filter. Available options depend on the selected filter.
Note: When there is more than one title filter applied to a clip, you can change the
order of filters by clicking the Move filter up arrow or Move filter down arrow
Titles and subtitles 131
that appear to the right of the filter list on the Text Settings page. Changing the order of
the title filters will have different effects on your clip.
Converting titles to image and animation files
You can convert a frame in a title clip to an image file (PNG) or you can convert title clips
with moving elements to animation files (UISX). The PNG and UISX file are saved as Alpha
channel files. Why convert titles? You can add converted titles to overlay tracks, extending
the creative options and attributes that you can use. For more information, see “Overlay
clips” on page 155.
Ensure that the text in your title is final before converting—converted text cannot be
edited.
To convert a title to an image (PNG)
1In the Timeline, click a clip in the Title track.
2Scrub to the frame that you want to capture as an image.
3Right-click the clip and choose Convert this frame to PNG.
The PNG file is added to the Library (Photos category).
To convert a moving title to an animated file (UISX)
1In the Timeline, click a Title track clip that includes moving elements.
2Right-click the clip and choose Convert to animation.
The UISX file is added to the Library (Videos category).
132 VideoStudio
3D Title Editor 133
3D Title Editor
You can use the 3D Title Editor to create three-dimensional titles for your movie projects.
You can control the look of the text as well as how it moves across the screen. For example,
you can create a metallic gold title that spins on and off screen or you can create a stone-
textured title where each letter or word scales and moves independently.
For information about standard (2D) titles, see “Titles and subtitles” on page 121.
This section contains the following topics:
• 3D Title Editor workspace
• Creating and editing 3D titles
3D Title Editor workspace
The 3D Title Editor window consists of the following components:
Areas of the 3D Title Editor: 1. Presets panel; 2. Player panel; 3. Settings panel; 4. Timeline panel;
5. Object List (Layers); 6. Timeline toolbar
1Presets panel: Lets you get started quickly with ready-made Text Objects and styles,
including lighting, camera, and material options.
2Player panel: Lets you view your 3D text and work interactively with it to set position,
orientation, and more. Use the playback controls to preview your 3D title.
3Settings panel: Customize your text by choosing settings for Text, Color, Texture, Bevel,
Opacity, Lights, and more.
134 VideoStudio
4Timeline panel: Lets you add, edit, and remove keyframes for the text object properties.
You can also add and delete text object layers, access the Object List, and use the tools
and controls on the Timeline toolbar. The scrubber in the Timeline panel is synchronized
with the Player panel.
5Object List: If you have multiple text objects in your project (separate words or letters,
for example), you can choose which object you want to display in the Timeline by using
the Object List drop-down menu above the key frame headers. The name of the layer is
determined by the text that you type in the Text Settings box.
6Timeline toolbar: Lets you type specific values for key frames and switch between
Move, Rotate, and Resize modes. You can also add or delete text object layers from the
timeline (buttons on the left side) and control which surfaces of the object are affected
by surface-related settings (such as color and material).
Creating and editing 3D titles
Here are the basic steps for creating a 3D title:
1Choose a preset text object or work with the default text object.
2Modify the settings for the text object to get the look you want.
3In the Timeline panel, start setting keyframes so you can apply changes to the style and
movement of the text.
4Preview your project in the Player panel, adjusting settings and keyframes to get the
effect you want.
5Click OK to return to the main application, where your 3D title appears on the timeline.
Experimenting is a good way to learn what is possible in terms of text styles and movements.
To create or edit a 3D title
1In VideoStudio, do one of the following:
• Click the 3D Title Editor button in the timeline toolbar.
• In the Library panel, choose the Title > 3D Title category, drag a title to the timeline,
and double-click it.
• Double-click an existing 3D title in the Timeline.
The 3D Title Editor opens.
2In the Settings panel, replace the default text by typing your text in the Text Settings
box.
If you want to have more than one text object (so you can apply different properties to
letters or words), in the Presets panel, choose Objects > Text Objects, and click a preset
3D Title Editor 135
thumbnail for each object that you want to add, using the Text Settings box to type the
final text for each object. At any point, you can select a specific text object for editing by
clicking the object in the Player panel.
3In Text Settings area of the Settings panel, format the text by using any of the spacing,
alignment, font, and size options.
4To determine the properties for your title in the starting position, in the Timeline panel,
click the name of the property that you want to adjust and do one of the following:
• For Position, Orientation (Rotate), and Scale (Resize), drag in the Player panel or for
precise settings, type values in the X, Y, and Z boxes on the Timeline toolbar.
• For Color and Opacity, in the Settings panel, adjust the settings in the Color and
Opacity areas.
• For Line Space and Character Space, click the character and line spacing buttons in
the Text Settings area .
If you want to adjust the Texture, Bevel, Lights, or Camera settings for the title, adjust
the settings in the corresponding area or in the Presets panel, choose presets from
Scene and Object Style. These settings do not have keyframes.
5In the Timeline panel, set any additional keyframes (for example your end point
keyframes), and set the properties you want for each keyframe.
If you simply have a start and end keyframe, a gradual change is applied between the
two keyframes. Set more frequent keyframes for faster changes.
6Use the playback controls in the Player panel to preview your 3D title.
7When you are finished editing your 3D title, click OK to close the 3D Title Editor
window. Your title is inserted in the Timeline (Title track).
You can apply different surface-related settings, such as color and material, to selected
surfaces. For example, you can apply blue to the front face, green to the back face, and
a wood grain material to the sides. Click any of the following buttons to select or
deselect the corresponding surface:
• Select front face
• Select front bevel face
• Select side face
• Select back bevel face
• Select back face
You can copy and paste keyframes for individual properties. On the Timeline, right-click
a keyframe and from the context menu, choose Copy keyframe. Move to a new
position along the Timeline, right-click, and from the context menu, choose Paste
keyframe.
When rotating (adjusting Orientation), you can press Ctrl while dragging the text in
the Player panel to adjust only the Z value.
136 VideoStudio
Transitions 137
Transitions
Transitions can help your movie switch smoothly from one scene to the next. They can be
applied to single clips or in between clips on all tracks in the Timeline. Effective use of this
feature can add a professional touch to your movie.
This section contains the following topics:
• Adding transitions
• Saving and deleting transitions
•Morph Transitions
• Seamless Transitions (Ultimate)
Adding transitions
There are many types of transitions in the Library. For every type, you choose a specific
preset effect by using the thumbnails. For example, you can choose from popular transition
styles such as Dissolve, Crossfade, and Fade to black.
To add a transition
•In the Edit workspace, do one of the following:
138 VideoStudio
• In the Library, click the Transition category button and select a transition category.
Scroll through the transitions in the Library. Select and drag a transition thumbnail
between two video clips in the Timeline. Drop your transition and it will snap into
place. You can only drag and drop one transition at a time.
• Double-click a transition thumbnail in the Library to automatically insert it into the first
empty transition slot between two clips. Repeat this process to insert a transition at the
next cut. To replace a transition in your project, drag the new transition onto the
transition thumbnail for replacement in the Storyboard View or Timeline View.
• Overlap two clips in the Timeline.
To add a transition automatically
1Select Settings > Preferences > and click the Edit tab.
2Under Transition Effect, enable Automatically add transition effect
The default transition is added automatically between clips.
Note: A default transition is always added automatically between overlapping clips,
whether the Automatically add transition effect in Preferences is enabled or not.
To add a selected transition to all video track clips
1Select the thumbnail of the transition.
2Click the Apply current effect to video track button or right-click on the transition
and select Apply current effect to video track.
To add random transitions to all video track clips
• Click the Apply random effect(s) to video track button .
To customize a preset transition
1Double-click a transition effect in the Timeline.
2Modify the attributes or behavior of the transition on the Transition page in the Options
Panel.
Transitions 139
To further customize transitions, you may also do one of the following:
•In Default transition effect duration, enter a value for the number of seconds
you want transitions to take place in between clips.
• Choose a transition effect from the Default transition effect drop-list.
•In Random effects, click the Customize button and select transitions you want
to use in your project when transitions are added in between clips.
Saving and deleting transitions
You can collect your favorite transitions from different categories and save them in the My
Favorites folder. This way, you can easily find the transitions that you use most often. You
can also delete transitions that you do not use.
To save a transition in My Favorites
1Select the thumbnail of the transition.
2Click the Add to My Favorites button to add the transition in the Favorites Library
list.
To delete a transition from a project
• Do one of the following:
• Click on the transition to be removed and press [Delete].
• Right-click on the transition and select Delete.
• Drag to separate two clips with transition effect.
Morph Transitions
The Morph Transition creates a fun metamorphosis effect by analyzing the content in one
clip and blending it into the content of the next clip.
You can customize how the morph transition occurs by setting a guide line for each clip to
help determine the area of focus for the transition, such as a horizon line. You can then
preview the transition and make adjustments to the guide line and length (duration) of the
transition. The guide line determines how the transition will be applied, so feel free to
experiment with the positioning until you achieve a result you like.
Morph transitions work best between clips that have similar reference points and clips that
are the same dimensions.
140 VideoStudio
You can set reference points to customize Morph Transition results.
To add a Morph Transition
1In the Library, click the Transition category button , choose F/X from the Gallery
drop-down menu or in the Search box, type Morph.
2Drag the Morph Transition thumbnail to the Timeline, between two clips.
3Preview the results in the Player panel. To adjust the duration of the transition or to set
where the transition starts and ends, drag the edges of the transition in the Timeline.
You can stop here if you like the results.
4If you want to edit the transition, double-click the transition in the Timeline to open the
Options panel, and click Customize.
5In the Morph Transition window, compare the orange transition guide lines in the Start
and End area.
6In the Start area and End area, drag to set the nodes for the orange guide line that will
be used as a reference point.
• You can add nodes by clicking the guide line.
• You can delete nodes by right-clicking a node and choosing Delete or Delete All (for
all but the first and last node).
7In the Preview area, use the playback controls to preview the transition.
8If required, adjust the guide lines to fine tune the transformation.
9Click OK to exit the editor and to return to the Timeline.
Transitions 141
Seamless Transitions (Ultimate)
The Seamless Transitions are motion-based animated effects that blur the passage from one
clip to the next, creating what is sometimes known as an invisible cut. Whether the motion
is up, down, or to the side, the result is similar to a whip pan effect. Some transitions include
rotation and you can edit the transitions to control the zoom level, position, edge softness,
and duration. For example, you can zoom in and align the sky in the first clip with a similarly
colored sky in the second clip, ensuring that the transition is as seamless as possible.
The Seamless Transition controls let you align the areas that will overlap and blend.
To apply a Seamless Transition
1In the Timeline, decide where you want to place your Seamless transition. Make note of
which edges you want to use for the transition (for example, the top edges because the
sky areas match).
2In the Library, click the Transition category button , and choose Seamless from the
Gallery drop-down menu.
3Click a transition thumbnail and preview it in the Player panel (in Clip mode) to ensure
that it will align your target edges.
4Drag the selected thumbnail to the Timeline, between two clips.
142 VideoStudio
5Preview the results in the Player panel. To adjust the duration of the transition or to set
where the transition starts and ends, drag the edges of the transition in the Timeline.
You can stop here if you like the results.
6To edit the transition, double-click the transition in the Timeline to open the Options
panel.
7Adjust any of the following settings directly in the Options panel, or click Customize for
a more global view of clip position and size:
• Duration: Sets the overall length of time for the transition.
• Soft Edge: Adjusts the softness of the edge along the transition line for the clips.
• Horizontal position: Lets you align the left-right (x-axis) position of the clip.
• Vertical position: Lets you align the top-bottom (y-axis) position of the clip.
• Scale: Adjusts the size of your clips to create a zoom in/zoom out effect. This can also
help you maximize the alignment of areas that match in each clip.
8Review your changes in the Player panel.
Graphics 143
Graphics
The Overlays Library contains basic shapes, animated overlays, and other graphics. Other
graphics, such as backgrounds, can be found in the Media Library.
This section contains the following topics:
• Adding color clips
• Adding color patterns
• Adding backgrounds
• Adding objects or frames
• Adding animations
Adding color clips
Color clips are solid colored backgrounds. You can use the preset color clips or create new
color clips in the Library. For example, you can insert a black color clip as background for
end credits.
To select a color clip in the Color Library
1Select Media from the Library Panel and choose Backgrounds > Solid Colors from the
Gallery drop-list.
2Choose the desired color as displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay
Track .
If you don’t see a color you want, add another color. You can change the color after by
double-clicking it in the Timeline and choosing a color from the Color Picker on the Edit
tab.
Adding color patterns
Color patterns are decorative backgrounds. You can use the preset color patterns or add an
image that you want to use as a new color pattern in the Library. For example, you can insert
a color pattern as a background for a title.
144 VideoStudio
To select a background pattern clip in the Library
1Select Media from the Library panel and choose Backgrounds > Images from the
Gallery drop-list.
2Choose the desired pattern as displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or Overlay
Track .
3To add a pattern that is not in the Library, click the Add box beside the Gallery drop-list.
In the Browse Graphics dialog box, choose the file that you want to add to the Library.
Adding backgrounds
You can add decorative backgrounds to your videos. The preset backgrounds include a
wide-range of colorful images that you can use to add visual appeal to your videos.
To select a background video in the Library
1Select Media from the Library panel and choose Backgrounds > Videos from the
Gallery drop-list.
2Choose the desired background as displayed in the Library and drag to the Video or
Overlay Track.
Adding objects or frames
Add decorative objects or frames to your videos as Overlay clips.
To add an object or frame
1Select Overlays from the Library panel and choose Basic Shapes or Graphics from the
Gallery drop-list.
2Select an object or frame from the Library and drag it onto the Overlay Track in the
Timeline.
3In the Player panel, adjust the size or position of the object or frame in the preview
window.
If you want to apply additional changes, in the Options panel, choose the options you
want from the Edit, Color, or Effect tabs.
Object Frame
Graphics 145
Adding animations
Give more life to your videos by adding animations as Overlay clips.
An Animation overlay (blue wavy bands) give a polished look to a video project.
To add an animation
1Select Overlays from the Library panel and choose Animated Overlays from the Gallery
drop-list.
2Select an animation from the Library then drag it onto the Overlay Track.
3In the Options panel, choose the options you want from the Edit, Color, or Effect tabs.
The Options panel was used to edit an Animation overlay, changing the hue and using
Chroma Key to create transparent areas.
146 VideoStudio
Video filters 147
Video filters
Video filters are effects that you can apply to clips in order to change their style or
appearance. Using filters is a creative way to enhance your clips or correct flaws in your
video. For example, you can make a clip look like a painting or improve its color balance.
This section contains the following topics:
• Applying filters
• Applying multiple filters
• Removing filters
• Marking filters as favorites
• Customizing filters
•AR Stickers
Applying filters
Filters let you apply a wide range of special effects and corrections. For example, the
following filters can be found in the Library:
•Cropping — lets you crop clips. You can fill the frame with the cropped result or show a
border
•Anti-Shake — reduces shake in your videos for a stabilizing effect
•AutoSketch — applies a beautiful drawing effect to the video
Filters can be applied alone or in combination with the Video, Overlay, Title, and Audio
Tracks.
To apply a video filter to a photo or video clip
1Click the Filter button in the Library to display the thumbnails of various filter
samples.
If you want to display the filters in the Library by category, choose a filter category from
the Gallery drop-list box.
2Drag and drop the video filter onto your clip.
3If you want to adjust the filter, in the Options panel, click Customize Filter on the Effect
tab. Available options depend on the selected filter.
148 VideoStudio
4Preview how your clip looks with the video filter applied to it using the Navigator.
You can show or hide filters in the Library by type by clicking the Show Video Filters
button or Show Audio Filters button .
You can also adjust a filter by choosing a thumbnail from the Presets drop-list on the
Effect tab.
Applying multiple filters
By default, the filter applied to a clip is always replaced with the new filter dragged onto the
clip. Uncheck Replace last filter to apply multiple filters to a single clip. VideoStudio allows
you to apply a maximum of five filters to a single clip.
When there is more than one video filter applied to a clip, you can change the order of filters.
Changing the order of the video filters will change the results.
When the Replace Last Filter check box is not marked, you can apply multiple filters to
a clip. In the example above, the filter list indicates two filters are applied: Cloud and
Duotone.
To apply multiple filters
1Double-click a clip in the Timeline, and in the Options panel, click the Effect tab.Unmark
the Replace last filter check box.
You can now apply up to five filters to a clip. The applied filters are listed in the box
below the check box.
To reorder filters
1Double-click a clip in the Timeline, and in the Options panel, click the Effect tab.
2In the list of applied filters, click a filter name, and to the right of the filter list, click the
Move filter up button or Move filter down button .
Note: Reordering filters affects the final results in the preview.
Video filters 149
Removing filters
You can remove one or more filters from a clip by deleting the filter from clip’s filter list.
When you remove a filter from a clip, any customizations you made to the filter are lost
unless you saved the settings to the My Favorites category in the Filters library.
To remove a filter from a clip
1Double-click a clip in the Timeline, and in the Options panel, click the Effect tab.
2In the filter list, click the name of the filter that you want to remove.
3On the right side of the filter list, click the Delete filter button .
Marking filters as favorites
You can collect your favorite filters from different categories by marking them and then
storing them in the My Favorites folder. This way, you can easily find the filters that you use
most often.
To mark a filter as a favorite
1Click the Filter button in the Library to display the thumbnails of various filter
samples.
2Choose the video filter that you want to mark as a favorite from the thumbnails shown in
the Library.
3Click the Add to My Favorites button to add the filter to the My Favorites category.
To find and apply a favorite filter
1In the Library panel, choose My Favorites category from the Gallery drop-list box.
2Choose the favorite video filter that you want to use from the thumbnails shown in the
Library.
Customizing filters
VideoStudio allows you to customize filters in a variety of ways. For example, you can adjust
any of the available settings for a selected filter. You can also add key frames to change how
your video filter will look at any point in a clip and to vary the look and intensity of an effect
over time.
You can save a customized filter to the Filter library in the My Favorites category.
150 VideoStudio
To customize a filter
1Drag and drop a video filter from the Library onto a clip on the Timeline.
2In the Options panel, click Customize Filter on the Effect tab.
The dialog box for the video filter appears.
Note: The available settings are different for each video filter.
3Adjust any of the available settings, and click OK.
To set key frames for effect filters
1Drag and drop a video filter from the Library onto a clip on the Timeline.
2In the Options panel, click Customize Filter on the Effect tab.
The dialog box for the video filter appears.
Note: The available settings are different for each video filter.
3In the Key frame controls, drag the Scrubber or use the arrows to go to the frame
where you'd like to change the attributes of your video filter.
Note: You can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out of the Timeline Control bar for
precise placement of key frames.
4Click Add key frame to set that frame as a key frame in the clip. You can adjust the
video filter settings for that particular frame.
Note: A diamond-shaped mark on the Timeline Control bar appears and indicates
that the frame is a key frame in the clip. When selected, the key frame marker changes to
red.
Key frame Controls
Video filters 151
5Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more key frames to your clip.
6Use the Timeline controls to edit or to go to a key frame in the clip.
• To delete a key frame, click Remove key frame .
• Click Reverse key frames to reverse the sequence of key frames on the Timeline
such that the sequence starts with the last key frame and ends with the first key frame.
• To move to the succeeding key frame, click Go to next key frame .
• To move to the key frame prior to the one selected, click Go to previous key frame .
7Click Fade In and Fade Out to establish fade points in your filter.
8Adjust the video filter settings according to your preferences.
9Preview the changes you've made by clicking Play in the Preview Window of the
dialog box.
10 Click OK when finished.
Note: To preview the clip with the video filter applied, use the Preview Window or an
external device such as a TV monitor or DV camcorder.
To choose the display medium, click , then click to open the Preview Playback
Options dialog box.
To save a customized filter to My Favorites
1On the Effect tab of the Options panel, click the name of the customized filter in the
filter list.
2To the right of the list, click the Add to My Favorites button .
The customized filter is added to the My Favorites category of the Filters library and is
labeled with the original filter name and a version number.
AR Stickers
Celebrate holidays, special occasions, or simply add a little fun to your videos with AR
Stickers (augmented reality image effects). AR stickers are image-based effects (hats,
glasses, creature features and other fun elements) that track a person’s face in a video and
map the AR sticker to the movement. For example, you can choose an AR sticker of
sunglasses that will be added to a person’s eye area and move with them in the video. AR
stickers work best when applied to a person who is facing the camera.
152 VideoStudio
VideoStudio comes with a library of AR stickers that are categorized by type. You can also
import PNG image files to create your own stickers. In most cases, PNG files that you use for
stickers should have a transparent background, leaving only the elements that you want to
display.
Note: If more than one person’s face is in the video, the AR sticker displays on whichever
face is detected best in any given frame.
To apply an AR Sticker to a person in a video clip
1Click the Filter button in the Library, and in the filter category list, click AR Stickers.
If you want to display the subcategories for AR Stickers, click the arrow to the left of AR
Stickers.
2Drag and drop the thumbnail for the AR sticker you want from the Library onto your clip
in the Timeline.
Like other effects, you can apply more than one AR sticker to a selected video clip by
unmarking the Replace Last Filter check box (Options panel > Effect tab).
AR stickers can be removed in the same way as other filters. For more information, see
“To remove a filter from a clip” on page 149.
To import a PNG file to the AR Sticker library
1Click the Filter button in the Library, and in the filter category list, click AR Stickers.
2Click the Import AR Stickers button to locate your PNG file.
3Select the file that you want to import.
4Click Open.
Video filters 153
5In the Import a new sticker window, drag the imported image to the position you want,
and drag a corner node to adjust the size of the sticker. Ensure the sticker is aligned the
way you want it to appear relative to the face.
6Click OK.
The new sticker is added to the Library.
154 VideoStudio
Overlay clips 155
Overlay clips
Adding multiple Overlay Tracks gives you more creative possibilities for your movie. You can
superimpose clips over a background video with portions of the overlay being transparent,
use a video mask, or add objects and frames to your video and control how they blend with
the background.
This section contains the following topics:
• Adding clips to overlay tracks
• Adjusting overlay clips
• Combining Overlay clips to create an Ultra HD (4K) video
• Applying motion to an overlay clip
• Adjusting the overall transparency of overlay clips
• Adding borders to overlay clips
• Using Chroma Key for a green screen effect
• Blending overlay clips with the background
• Adding a mask frame
• Using video masks with overlay clips
Adding clips to overlay tracks
Drag media files to the Overlay Track on the Timeline to add them as overlay clips for your
project.
To add a clip to the Overlay Track
1In the Library, select the media folder that contains the Overlay clip that you want to add
to your project.
2Drag the media file from the Library to the Overlay Track on the Timeline.
Note: You can also use color clips as Overlay clips. To add more tracks, see “Adding and
swapping tracks” on page 65.
3To customize the Overlay clip, select the clip and edit it interactively in the Player panel
preview window, or open the Options panel, and modify the settings.
156 VideoStudio
Adjusting overlay clips
Achieving different effects for your projects is easy when you know how to use Overlay clips
and tracks.
To split a clip in the Video and Overlay Tracks
1In the Timeline, select a clip.
2In the navigation area of the Player panel or in the Timeline, move the scrubber to the
point where you want to split the clip.
3In the Player panel, click the Split Clip button .
To reposition an Overlay clip
1In the Timeline, select the clip.
2Do one of the following:
• Drag the Overlay clip to the desired area on the Preview Window.
• In the Preview Window, right-click the clip and choose an option from the context
menu.
• In the Options panel, click Alignment Options on the Edit tab, and click an option
from the drop-list.
To resize an Overlay clip
• In the Preview Window, drag the handles on the Overlay clip to resize it.
Note: If you drag a corner handle, it will keep the aspect ratio when you resize the clip.
To distort the Overlay clip
• In the Preview Window, drag the green handles on the Overlay clip to distort it.
Overlay clips 157
Drag the green nodes to distort a clip.
Combining Overlay clips to create an Ultra HD (4K) video
Some Ultra HD (4K resolution) videos are created by combining four full HD files shot with a
4K camera. Apart from adding Overlay effects, you can use Overlay Tracks to assemble HD
videos into one Ultra HD (4K) movie.
To merge HD files using Overlay clips
1In the Library, select the media folder that contains the four HD files that you want to
assemble.
Each file represents a quadrant of the Ultra HD (4K) video.
2Drag each file from the Library to an Overlay Track on the Timeline.
3Resize the Overlay clips to make them fit into the Preview Window.
4Reposition the Overlay clips. For more information, see “Adjusting overlay clips” on
page 156.
Even if you have not rendered the video, the Ultra HD (4K) video can be imported into
a new project as a *.vsp file for easier editing.
Applying motion to an overlay clip
To apply motion to an Overlay clip
1In the Timeline, select an overlay clip.
158 VideoStudio
2In the Options panel, click the Edit tab.
3Do one of the following:
• Enable the Basic Motion option, and click an Enter and Exit arrow.
• Enable the Advanced Motion option, and click Customize Motion. For more
information, see “Customizing motion” on page 186.
Pause duration determines how long your pause will be in the designated area before
the clip exits the screen. If you applied motion to the Overlay clip, drag the Trim
markers to set the Pause duration.
Adjusting the overall transparency of overlay clips
You can quickly adjust the overall transparency of an overlay clip to achieve a semi-
transparent effect. For more control over how the overlay clip blends with the background,
see “Blending overlay clips with the background” on page 159.
You can also adjust the transparency of tracks using Track Transparency mode. See “Track
transparency” on page 102.
To apply transparency to an Overlay clip
1In the Timeline, select an overlay clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Edit tab, and enter a value in the Transparency box
(below Fill Color).
Adding borders to overlay clips
You can add a border to an overlay clip. For example, you add a white border around an
image to make it look more like a photo.
To add a border to an Overlay clip
1In the Timeline, select an overlay clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Edit tab, and enter a value in the Border box (below Fill
Color) to set the thickness of the border for the Overlay clip.
3Click the Border color box located beside the arrow keys to set the color of the border.
Overlay clips 159
Using Chroma Key for a green screen effect
Chroma Key is used to remove a specific color from an overlay clip. For example, if you
capture a subject against a “green screen” background or cover part of a subject with green,
Chroma Key can be used to remove the green. You can then place the subject on another
background to change the surroundings or create a special effect such as the appearance of
a hovering object.
You can use Chroma Key to replace the background behind subjects captured against
a green screen.
To use Chroma Key to make selected colors transparent
1In the Timeline, select an overlay clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Chroma Key tab.
3Enable the Chrome Key check box.
4Use the eye dropper tool to pick a color that you want to make transparent in the
Preview Window.
5Adjust the color similarity value (to the right of the eye dropper tool). The transparency
effect appears in the Preview Window.
6If you want to crop the edges of the overlay, you can type a value in the Width and
Height boxes. The value is a percentage of the full dimension.
If you want to fine-tune how the overlay blends with the background, adjust the
settings on the Blend tab. For more information, see “Blending overlay clips with the
background” on page 159.
Blending overlay clips with the background
You can specify how overlay clips blend with the background by using different blend
modes. VideoStudio includes the following blend modes:
Note: The example images use 100% Opacity for each blend mode.
160 VideoStudio
•Normal — displays pixels of the underlying clip based on the opacity of pixels on the
selected clip. If the selected clip is fully opaque, no pixels show through. As the opacity
decreases, more pixels from the underlying clip shows through.
•Gray Key — adjusts the transparency of the overlay clip based on tone (light/dark
values), rather than color.
.
•Multiply — multiplies the value of the overlay colors with the underlying colors and
divides by 255. The result is darker than the original colors. White has no blend effect;
black always blends to black. You can use the Blend/Opacity slider to adjust the
transparency.
.
•Screen — lightens underlying colors by multiplying the inverse of the selected clip and
the underlying clip. The result is a color that is the same or a lightened version of the
selected clip.
Overlay clips 161
.
•Add Key — adds the color values of the overlay clip with the values of the underlying
colors. You can use the Blend/Opacity slider to adjust the transparency.
.
•Overlay —combines the Multiply and Screen blend modes. If the color channel value of
underlying clip is less than half the maximum value, the Multiply blend mode is used. If
the color channel value is greater than or equal to half the value, the Screen blend mode
is used. The Overlay blend mode shows patterns or colors of the selected clip while
preserving the shadows and highlights of the underlying clip.
.
•Difference — subtracts the color of the selected clip from the color of the underlying
clip.
162 VideoStudio
.
•Hue — applies the hue of the selected clip to the underlying clip (without changing the
saturation or lightness).
.
The settings available depend on the blend mode that you choose. Experiment with the
settings to achieve the look you want. You can also blend clips using Chroma Key. For
specific information about Chroma Key, see “Using Chroma Key for a green screen effect” on
page 159.
To blend an overlay clip with the background
1In the Timeline, select an overlay clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Blending tab.
3From the Blending Modes drop-down menu, choose one of the following options:
• Normal
• Gray Key
• Multiply
• Screen
• Add Key
• Overlay
• Difference
• Hue
4Adjust any of the following settings (availability of controls depends on the blending
mode you select):
Overlay clips 163
• Width and Height — let you crop the edges of the overlay clip.
• Opacity — adjusts the overall transparency level of the overlay.
5Using the interactive bar, experiment with any of the following settings to achieve the
results you want (availability of controls depends on the blending mode you select):
• Gamma — affects image contrast and can be used to lighten (move control to the
right) or darken (move control to the left) the overall image
• Min — can be moved to the right to darken the image’s lightest pixels
• Max — can be moved to the left to lighten the image’s darkest pixels
• Cutoff — can be moved to the right to set a new black point for the image (more black
in the image).
• Threshold — can be moved to the left to set a new white point for the image (more
white in the image).
You can invert the blend settings by enabling the Invert check box.
Adding a mask frame
Adding a mask or a matte to an overlay clip applies a shape around it that you can render
opaque or transparent.
To add a mask frame
1In the Timeline, select an overlay clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Blending tab.
3From the Matte Modes drop-list, choose Mask Frame.
4Select a mask frame.
If you want to choose a mask that you have created, you can import it by clicking the
Add mask item(s) button , and browsing for the image file.
5Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings affect the image.
164 VideoStudio
Note: You can use any image file for a mask. If your mask is not in the required 8-bit
bitmap format, VideoStudio automatically converts the mask. You can use programs
such as Corel PaintShop Pro and CorelDRAW to create an image mask.
Using video masks with overlay clips
A video mask is an animated way to reveal the content of an overlay clip. It is similar to a
transition in function. You can apply an existing video mask, create and import your own
video mask, or import a third-party video mask.
A video mask is a creative way to reveal the underlying content.
There are many ways to make your own video masks. For example, start a new project, and
from the Graphics category in the Library, add a black color swatch and a white color swatch
to the Timeline. Apply a transition and match the duration to the two swatches. Save your
work to a video file (such as MPEG 4, AVI, or MOV). You can then import the file as a video
mask.
You can also use the Mask Creator to create video masks. For more information, see
“Working with the Mask Creator (Ultimate)” on page 95.
To apply a video mask to an overlay clip
1In the Timeline, select an overlay clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Blending tab.
3From the Matte Modes drop-list, choose Video Mask.
4Select a mask.
If you want to choose a mask that you have created, you can import it by clicking the
Add mask item(s) button , and browsing for the video file.
5Watch the Preview Window to see how the new settings affect the image.
You can remove files from the video masks list by clicking the thumbnail for the mask,
and clicking the Remove mask item button .
Overlay clips 165
You can create a folder for video masks in the default user content folder:
...Documents/Corel VideoStudio Pro/24.0/.
166 VideoStudio
Color correction and color grading 167
Color correction and
color grading
VideoStudio includes a collection of color adjustment tools that let you correct the color in
video clips or let you get creative with color grading to achieve a specific mood or look. You
can even apply LUT profiles (lookup tables) for a professional result!
The color controls available in VideoStudio depend on the version of the application you
have.
This section contains the following topics:
• Using the Color controls
• Basic color and tone correction
• Adjusting white balance
•Tone Curve
• HSL Tuning
• Color Wheel
• Video scopes
• Color grading with lookup tables (LUT profiles)
Using the Color controls
The Color tab in the Options panel provides a variety of color adjustment tools. In many
cases, you can achieve good color and tone results using the Basic controls, but the other
color correction and color grading tools offer more precise control. Sometimes it is a matter
of preference; sometimes it is a matter of one tool providing an easier way to get a specific
result.
In addition to creating your own creative look, you can apply and import LUT profiles (lookup
tables). For more information, see “Color grading with lookup tables (LUT profiles)” on
page 175.
Video Scopes
Video scopes offer a way of evaluating the tone and color of your video clip by displaying
the color data for the clip in different visual representations. Because the information is data-
based, scopes can help you adjust color and tone without relying solely on the color
168 VideoStudio
calibration of the screen that you’re working with. For more information about Video scopes,
see “Video scopes” on page 173.
To access color correction and color grading controls
1Select a clip in the Timeline.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
3Click any of the following buttons:
• Basic
• Auto Tone
• White Balance
• Tone Curve
• HSL Tuning
• Color Wheel
• LUT Profile
Basic color and tone correction
VideoStudio includes many common controls that let you adjust color, clarity, and tone.
Basic controls include the following: Hue, Exposure, Contrast, Gamma, Blacks, Shadows,
Midrange, Highlights, Whites, Vibrance, Saturation, Clarify, and Haze.
To adjust basic color, tone, and clarity
1In the Timeline or Library of the Edit workspace, select a video or image clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
3Click the Basic button.
4Adjust any of the controls by dragging the sliders.
5Watch the Preview to see how the new settings affect the image.
Note: Double-click a slider to reset it. To clear all changes, click the Reset button.
To adjust the tone quality of your video or image clips
1In the Timeline of the Edit workspace, select a video or image clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab, and click Auto Tone.
Note: You can indicate if you want the clip as Brightest, Brighter, Normal, Darker or
Darkest by clicking the Auto Tone Adjustment drop-list.
Color correction and color grading 169
Adjusting white balance
White balance restores the natural color temperature of an image by removing unwanted
color casts due to conflicting light sources and incorrect camera settings.
For example, an object illuminated with incandescent lights may turn out too reddish or
yellowish in an image or video clip. To successfully achieve a natural look, you need to
identify a reference point in your image which represents the color white. VideoStudio gives
you different options in selecting the white point:
•White balance presets — Choose from presets that include Vivid Color or Normal
Color, and adjust the level of preset with Weaker, Normal, and Stronger options.
•Auto — Automatically chooses a white point that is well-matched with the overall color
of your image.
•Pick Color — Allows you to manually select the white point in the image. Use the
Eyedropper Tool to pick a reference area that should be white or neutral gray.
•Temperature — Allows you to specify color temperature of light sources in Kelvin (K).
You can also click one of the lighting condition icons. Lower values indicate Tungsten,
Fluorescent and Daylight scenarios while Cloudy, Shade and Overcast fall under high
color temperature.
To adjust White balance
1In the Timeline or Library of the Edit workspace, select a video or image clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
3Click the White Balance button.
4Mark the White Balance check box.
5Determine how you want to identify the white point. Choose among the different
options (Auto, Pick Color, White Balance presets (lighting icons) or Temperature).
6If you have selected Pick color, choose Show preview to display a preview area in the
Options Panel.
170 VideoStudio
When you drag your cursor to the preview area, it will change to an eyedropper icon.
7Click the preview to identify a reference point in your image which represents the color
white.
8Compare the preview area to the image in the Player panel to see how the new settings
affect the image.
Tone Curve
The Tone Curve lets you perform color and tonal corrections by adjusting either individual
color channels or the composite (RGB) channel.
The x-axis of the graph represents the original tonal values (from highlights on the right, to
shadows on the left); the y-axis of the graph represents the adjusted tonal values (from dark/
less color at the bottom, to light/more color at the top).
The diagonal line on the graph is what you adjust to create your “curve”. Moving the curve
up and to the left lightens the clip and increases the color in any channel; moving the curve
down and to the right darkens the clip or decreases the color of a given channel. If you have
a clip with a blue cast, for example, you can decrease the blue in the image by selecting the
Blue channel and moving the curve down and to the right.
You can add one or more nodes to the curve, to give you more precise control over the areas
that you want to adjust.
To adjust color and tone with Tone Curve
1In the Timeline, select the video clip that you want to color correct.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
3Click the Tone Cur ve button.
4Below the curve graph, select one of the following color channel options:
• RGB — lets you edit the red, green, and blue channels in a combined histogram
x-axis
y-axis
Color correction and color grading 171
• Red — lets you edit the red channel only
• Green — lets you edit the green channel only
• Blue — lets you edit the blue channel only
5Drag points on the graph to adjust the relationship between the Input levels (the
brightness of the original pixels) and the Output levels (the brightness of the corrected
pixels).
6If you want to add a point to the curve, click along the line where you want to add the
point.
Note: To clear all changes, click the Reset button.
HSL Tuning
HSL (Hue, Saturation, Lightness) is a powerful color adjustment tool that lets you interactively
adjust colors in a clip. This lets you target specific colors.
An interactive control can be dragged across a clip in the Player panel to adjust hue,
saturation, or lightness of the underlying sample area.
To adjust color with HSL Tuning
1In the Timeline, select the video clip that you want to color correct.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
3Click the HSL Tuning button.
4In the HSL drop-list, select one of the following options:
• Hue
• Saturation
• Lightness
5Do one of the following:
172 VideoStudio
• Click the interactive color tool , and in the Player panel drag across a color in the
clip that you want to adjust. Dragging to the left, moves the corresponding sliders to
the left; dragging to the right, moves the corresponding sliders to the right.
• Adjust the individual sliders to set the values you want.
Note: You can apply a preset by choosing an option from the Select Preset drop-list.
You can also save your custom settings as a preset by clicking Save as preset. To clear all
changes, click the Reset button.
Color Wheel
The Color Wheel feature lets you adjust the tone of your image by adjusting the slider next
to the Color Shift (applies to all areas of the image), Highlights, Midtones, or Shadows
wheel. The wheels let you adjust the colors for specific areas of exposure in the image. For
example, you could apply a blue cast to the shadow areas of video clip.
To adjust the tone or color of a clip with the Color Wheel
1In the Timeline, select the video clip that you want to color correct.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
3Click the Color Wheel button.
4To adjust the brightness of the clip, drag the slider to the left of the Color Shift (entire
image), Highlights, Midtones, or Shadows wheel. Dragging the slider up increases
brightness for the corresponding areas of the selected video frame. Dragging the slider
down decreases brightness.
5To adjust color, drag the color indicator circle (in the middle of the color wheels) to set a
color for the corresponding areas. For example, to remove a blue color cast from dark
areas of a video clip, drag the color indicator for the Shadows wheel towards the yellow
side of the circle.
tone
slider
movable
color
indicator
Color correction and color grading 173
Video scopes
VideoStudio offers the following video scopes to help you evaluate the color and tone
information in your video clips. As you make color adjustments, the information on the
scopes changes, so you can evaluate the impact of the change in the Color Grading view in
the Player panel or by using the color data depicted in the video scope.
Waveform
A waveform scope displays the chrominance in a video clip using a graph where the vertical
axis represents intensity, from zero at the bottom to 100% at the top.
A Waveform scope shows the distribution of colors from zero intensity at the bottom to
100% intensity at the top
Vector - Color (Vectorscope)
Vectorscopes have been used by video professionals for a wide range of purposes, including
evaluating if the color intensity of video footage was within standard broadcast range. The
circle of the color vector scope displays chrominance (color intensity), from zero intensity at
the center of the circle, to 100% intensity towards the edge of the circle. The circle is divided
into color areas, making it easy to see the color dispersion for the currently selected frame
in the video clip. Small grids towards the edge of the circle are used to mark the intensity
limit — pixels that appear beyond the targets are not considered broadcast safe.
Skin Tone Line
174 VideoStudio
Histogram
A histogram lets you display the tonal and color range of a video. Evaluating the distribution
of pixels for a selected frame in your video lets you determine if there is a color cast or in the
case of underexposed footage, it can help you determine if there is enough image data in
the shadow areas to correct the imbalance.
The histogram displays the distribution of pixels for the clip, from dark (shadows) to
light (highlights) along the horizontal axis.
RGB Parade
The RGB Parade scope lets you view the red (R), green (G) and blue (B) components of your
video clip in a graph, where the vertical axis represents zero intensity (bottom) to 100%
intensity (top).
RGB Parade lets you evaluate the colors relative to each
To display a video scope
1In the Timeline, select the video clip that you want to color correct.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
3Click any of the color correction buttons to choose a color correction method.
Color correction and color grading 175
4To the right of the color controls, enable the Show Video Scope check box at the top of
the panel.
Note: You might need to maximize the VideoStudio window to view the video scope.
5From the drop-list, choose one of the following videoscopes:
• Waveform
• Vector - Color
• Histogram
• RGB Parade
To use a vectorscope to display skin tone
1In the Timeline, select the video clip that you want to color correct.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
3Click one of the following options:
• .Tone Cur ve
• HSL Tuning
• Color Wheel
4Enable the Show Video Scope check box at the top of the panel, and from the drop-list,
choose Vector - Color.
Note: Depending on the app window size, you might need to scroll (horizontal) to see
all the controls.
For natural skin tones, ensure the skin tone colors are plotted along the skin tone line.A
5Using the Skin Tone Line as a guide (skin tones should fall along the line), make any color
adjustments with the tools of your choice.
Color grading with lookup tables (LUT profiles)
You can color grade your video clips by applying a lookup table file, also known as a LUT
profile. LUT profiles are typically used to recreate a specific film look that affects the overall
mood of the clip. The LUT profiles contain color values that combine with the color values of
your clip to create a new result.
Skin Tone Line
176 VideoStudio
Note: If you need to correct the color in your video clip, it’s best to do this before you apply
a LUT profile, especially if you have several video clips that will have the same coloring.
LUT profiles let you recreate a specific film or creative look.
To apply a LUT Profile
1Select a clip in the Timeline.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
3Click LUT Profile.
4Click a thumbnail to apply the corresponding profile to your clip.
A green check mark appears in the upper right corner of the selected thumbnail.
5At the top of the panel, drag the Intensity slider to adjust the profile.
To remove a LUT Profile
1Select the affected clip in the Timeline.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
3Click LUT Profile.
4Click the active thumbnail with the green check mark in the upper right corner.
The green check mark disappears and the LUT profile is removed from the clip.
To import a LUT profile
1In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
2Click LUT Profile.
3At the top of the panel, click the Import LUT profile button (plus symbol), and choose
the file you want (.cube file format).
A new thumbnail is added to the LUT Profile library.
To remove a LUT profile from a video clip
1In the Timeline, select the video clip.
2In the Options panel, click the Color tab.
Color correction and color grading 177
3Click the Basic button, and below the Color Correction section, choose None from the
LUT Profile drop-down menu.
178 VideoStudio
Motion tracking 179
Motion tracking
VideoStudio lets you create tracking paths in video clips and track particular elements in your
video. Motion Tracking eliminates the multiple and repetitive steps of adding objects into the
Timeline and the use of key frames to induce movement.
Furthermore, the motion tracking feature lets you create seamless optical illusions that allow
for titles to be embedded into the video clips and follow camera movement, just like
shooting video with titles originally in the footage!
Customize motion lets you create your own motion paths that you can save to the Path
folder in the Library.
This section contains the following topics:
• Tracking motion of video objects
• Matching motion to a tracking path
• Customizing motion
Tracking motion of video objects
The Track Motion feature allows you to track the motion of a point or area in a video and
automatically generate a tracking path in the process.
Track Motion works in tandem with the Match Motion feature. Match Motion allows you
to make your overlays and titles automatically follow the tracking path that you create.
If you prefer to manually animate overlays and titles to match your main background
video, you can use the Customize Motion feature.
180 VideoStudio
Motion Tracking interface basics
Track Motion dialog box
Part Description
1 — Tracker Specifies the object being tracked to create the tracking path.
This can also appear as an area depending on the selected tracker
type.
2 — Playback Control Buttons that control video playback.
3 — Timeline Control The Video Timeline along with zoom and track in/out controls.
4 — Tracker Control Buttons and options that let you control the properties of the
trackers, tracking paths and matched objects.
5 — Preview Window Shows the current video being played.
6 — Matched object Where the matched object is placed.
7 — Tracking path The path of the motion tracked by the program.
8 — Timecode Lets you jump directly to a specific part of the video by specifying
the exact timecode.
Track Motion buttons and options
Track Motion — Tracks the motion of the selected tracker in
the video clip automatically.
Reset to default position — Discards all actions.
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
Motion tracking 181
To launch the Track Motion dialog box
• You can do one of the following:
• Select a video file on the Video Track and click the Track Motion button on the
Toolbar.
• Click Tools > Track Motion and choose a video file.
To track the motion of video objects
1Click Tools > Track Motion.
Track in / Track out — Specifies a working range in the video
clip where motion is tracked.
Zoom in / Zoom out — Adjusts your view of the Video
Timeline.
Show tracking path — Shows or hides the tracking path in the
Preview Window.
The eye on each tracker indicates its status. When enabled, an
open eye appears and the tracker is visible in the Preview
Window. When disabled, the closed eye appears and the
selected tracker is hidden.
Add tracker / Remove tracker — Adds and removes trackers
Rename tracker — Renames the active tracker
Save to path library — Saves the active paths to the path
library.
Set tracker as point / Set tracker as area /Set multi-point
tracker— Lets you choose a single tracking point, a set
tracking area, or a dynamic multi-point area.
Apply/hide mosaic — Applies a mosaic effect over the
tracked object. This button lets you blur the area of the tracked
object. You can choose a rectangular or circular mosaic.
Adjust Mosaic size — Lets you set the size for the mosaic
pattern
Add matched object — Adds a matched object and lets you
adjust the position from the Position drop-list or the Preview
Window.
Cancel — Closes the Track Motion dialog box and discards any
changes made on the video.
OK — Closes the Track Motion dialog box and keeps the path
tracked as a video attribute.
182 VideoStudio
2Browse for the video that you want to use and click Open. This opens the Track Motion
dialog box.
In this example, a video of a boy walking by the lake is selected.
3Drag the tracker to the part of the video that you want to track.
In the example, the tracker is dragged to the face of the boy. The area is magnified to
give you a closer view of your selection.
4In the Tracker type area, choose one of the following trackers:
• Set tracker as point (default) — lets you set a single tracking point.
• Set tracker as area — lets you set a fixed tracking area. This gives you a larger
sample area but also lets you set the boundaries for a Mosaic blur. You can adjust the
shape and size of the tracker by dragging the corner nodes.
• Set multi-point tracking — lets you set a dynamic tracking area that adjusts in size
and shape as the object moves closer or further from the camera or changes angles.
Drag the four nodes to the inside edges of the area that you want to track. This type of
tracker automatically applies a Mosaic blur. For more information see “To blur parts of
tracked objects” on page 194.
5Click the Track Motion button .
The video is played as the tracking path is generated. If Show tracking path is selected,
the tracking path is displayed and highlighted once the tracking process is completed.
Motion tracking 183
6Click OK.
It is easier to track points or areas in your video that are distinctly in contrast with other
video elements. Avoid choosing pixels that may blend with similar pixels in the video.
Matching motion to a tracking path
Using the Match Motion feature, you can automatically match the motion of overlays and
titles with a tracking path to create the effect of one element following another. For example,
you can identify a moving person in a video by matching a title name to his tracking path.
Match Motion dialog box
Part Description
1 — Playback Control Buttons that control video playback.
2 — Timeline Control The Video Timeline along with zoom controls.
3 — Attribute Panel Defines the Position, Size, Opacity, Rotation, Shadow, Border,
Mirror and Ease in/out controls.
4 — Preview Window Shows the current video being played.
5 — Matched object Specifies where the matched object is placed, which can be a
title or overlay. This is applicable only in Match Motion.
6 — Motion path The path of the motion as manually defined. This is shown only
in the Customize Motion dialog box.
7 — Object distortion window Controls the orientation of the video clip / overlay object.
1
2
3
8
4
9
5
7
6
Match Motion / Customize Motion buttons and options
Add keyframe — Adds a keyframe
Remove keyframe — Removes a keyframe
Go to previous keyframe — Jumps to the previously available
keyframe
Reverse keyframe — Reverses the current keyframe
Move keyframe to the left — Moves the current key frame one
step to the left
Move keyframe to the right — Moves the current key frame
one step to the right
Go to next keyframe — Jumps to the next available keyframe
Tracker menu — Lets you select the tracker that the matched
object will follow. This is shown only in the Match Motion
dialog box.
Reset — Discards all actions. This is shown only in the
Customize Motion dialog box.
Save to — Saves the active paths to the path library. This is
shown only in the Customize Motion dialog box.
Cancel — Closes the Customize Motion / Match Motion
dialog box and discards any changes made on the video.
OK — Closes the Customize Motion / Match Motion dialog
box and saves the path tracked as a video clip attribute.
184 VideoStudio
Match Motion / Customize Motion right-click menu
8 — Key frame Control Adds, removes and controls the position / offset of key frames.
9 — Timecode Lets you jump directly to a specific part of the video by
specifying the exact timecode.
Part Description
Motion tracking 185
To launch the Match Motion dialog box
• Right-click an overlay clip on the Timeline and choose Motion > Match Motion.
To match motion to a tracking path
1Insert a video with tracking path in the video track.
2Insert a title clip in the overlay track and adjust its properties to match your project.
In this example, the name of the boy in the video is added to the title track.
3Right-click the title in the title track and select Motion > Match Motion. This opens the
Match Motion dialog box.
4If you have more than one tracker, select the tracker that you want to match.
In the sample video, Tracker 01, which represents the tracking path of the boy, is selected.
5Adjust the properties of your title depending on the requirements of your project.
Each time you set a value, a key frame is added.
Match Motion / Customize Motion right-click menu
Add key frame Adds a key frame
Remove key frame Removes a key frame
Keep Aspect Ratio Maintains the width to height ratio when you resize the video
clip or overlay object.
Reset Distort Reverts to the original aspect ratio after you distort the clip or
object.
Show object distortion
window
Displays/hides the object distortion window that controls the
orientation of the video clip / overlay object.
Show Grid Lines Launches the Grid Line Options window that modifies the grid
line settings.
Show background video Displays/hides the other tracks in the Timeline.
Show result in preview
window
Enables/disables simultaneous display of edits on the preview
window.
Adjust view size (Mouse
wheel)
Changes zoom settings to 100%, 50%, or 33%. Alternatively,
you can zoom in or out using the mouse wheel.
186 VideoStudio
In this example, Offset values are adjusted to set the ideal distance between the boy and
the title. The Size and Opacity values are also adjusted to make sure that the title is
visible and yet a bit transparent.
Note: If you need to turn and move the clip around the video, you can set the values
under Offset and Rotation. You also have the option to add a shadow and border, or
mirror your image. Clicking the Ease in/Ease out button / allows the motion to
start out slowly or slow down as it comes to an end. Drag the slider to control the timing.
6Play the video to test your animation. When done, click OK.
The result of our sample project is shown below.
You can tweak the properties of your overlays and titles by using key frames, dragging
the tracker and adjusting values in the Match Motion dialog box.
To unlink overlay clips from tracking paths
• Right-click the overlay clip and select Motion > Remove Motion.
Customizing motion
Using the Customize Motion feature, you can manually set the motion of overlays and titles
to complement the motion of elements in a background video (without reference to any
existing tracking information). This means that you can define your own motion path and
modify various properties to create simple or complex motion effects. For example, using
keyframes, you can control the size, opacity, and rotation of an object as it moves across the
path you set for it. You can also gradually ease the motion in or out and apply a motion blur
with Auto Motion Blur that matches the movement of the selected object as it moves along
the path.
Motion tracking 187
Adding Auto Motion Blur (example on right side) applies a blur that corresponds to the
movement of the selected object as it moves along the path.
You can save a custom motion to the Library as a path, with or without other property
settings.
Customize Motion dialog box
Part Description
1 — Playback Control Buttons that control video playback.
2 — Timeline Control The Video Timeline along with zoom controls.
3 — Attribute Panel Defines the Position, Size, Opacity, Rotation, Shadow, Border,
Mirror and Ease in/out controls.
4 — Preview Window Shows the current video being played.
5 — Motion path The path of the motion as manually defined. This is shown only
in the Customize Motion dialog box.
6 — Object distortion window Controls the orientation of the video clip / overlay object.
1
2
3
7
4
8
5
6
188 VideoStudio
To launch the Customize Motion dialog box
• Right-click a video clip on the Timeline and choose Motion >Customize Motion.
You can also open the Customize Motion dialog box by clicking the Effect tab from
the Options Panel, and then clicking the Advanced Motion option. This option is
available only when a clip is selected on the Overlay Track.
To customize a motion path
1Right-click a background video or an overlay clip in the Timeline and select Motion >
Customize Motion. The Customize Motion dialog box opens.
In this example, the title is shown with a straight line motion path.
2Change the shape of your motion path by dragging line segments and key frame nodes.
Note: Key frame nodes are automatically added every time you move to another frame
and make a modification. You can also create a key frame node by dragging the
scrubber and clicking the Add key frame button .
3Adjust the properties of your title depending on the requirements of your project.
Each time you set a value, a key frame is added.
The example below shows the title after adjusting Position, Size and Rotation values.
7 — Keyframe Control Adds, removes and controls the position / offset of key frames.
8 — Timecode Lets you jump directly to a specific part of the video by
specifying the exact timecode.
Part Description
Motion tracking 189
If you want to change the center reference for the object (to offset rotation or zoom
effect), in the preview window, drag the red centre marker to a new position
Note: You also have the option to change the opacity, add a shadow and border, and
mirror your image by adjusting the values under Opacity, Shadow, Border, and Mirror.
Clicking the Ease in/Ease out button / allows the motion to start out slowly or slow
down as it comes to an end. Drag the slider to control the easing in and out timing. In
addition, you can enable the Auto Motion Blur check box to automatically add a motion
blur to the moving object.
4Play the video to test your animation. When done, click OK.
If an existing tracking path is customized, existing match motion information in the
video will be converted to a generic moving path.
To save a custom motion to the Path Library
1After you create a custom motion in the Customize Motion dialog box, click Save to.
2In the Save to Path Library dialog box, type a name in the Path name box.
3Choose one of the following Options:
• Path with all attributes — saves the path and the attributes assigned to the keyframes
• Path only — saves the path only; no other attributes are saved
4In the Save to drop-list, choose a folder.
To remove custom motion from a clip in the Timeline
1In the Timeline, right-click a clip that has custom motion applied, and from the context-
menu choose Motion > Remove Motion.
190 VideoStudio
Tracking paths 191
Tracking paths
VideoStudio lets you track specific points or areas to create a moving path. This path
represents the location of the selected point or area within the sequence of video frames.
Once you have tracking paths, you can choose to add matched objects around the tracker
area or blur video elements using the tracker.
This section contains the following topics:
• Adjusting tracking paths
• Using objects on tracking paths
• Using the Path Library
Adjusting tracking paths
You can fine-tune or modify the behavior of a tracking path by manually resetting track
points. For more information on creating tracking paths, see “Tracking motion of video
objects” on page 179.
To adjust tracking paths
1Select a video file on the Video Track and click the Track Motion button on the
Toolbar.
2From the list of trackers, select the tracker that you want to adjust.
3Drag the Scrubber to locate the point where you want to adjust the path.
4Drag the tracker to the new key frame position.
5Click the Track Motion button to retrack the path. The tracker continues tracking
using the new key frame position.
Adjusting the track points allows you to fine-tune or smoothen the movement of
matched objects.
192 VideoStudio
To define the tracking path duration
1Drag the Scrubber to the point where you want to start motion tracking. Click the Track
in button .
2Drag the Scrubber to the point where you want to end motion tracking. Click the Track
out button .
The tracking path duration is defined.
To extend tracking path duration
1Drag the Scrubber to the untracked area where you want to end motion tracking.
2Click the Track Motion button .
The motion of the tracked object and the extended path are generated.
Dragging the Scrubber and clicking the Track in button removes the current path
and marks a new starting point.
To reset tracking paths
• You can reset the current tracking path and select a new area to track by doing any of the
following:
• Drag the tracker point to another location.
• Drag the Scrubber to another location and click the Track in button .
• Click the Reset button .
To show or hide trackers
• Click or to show or hide trackers.
To add trackers
1Click the Add a new tracker button to add the second tracker. A new tracker appears
on the screen and a new tracker is added to the list.
2Drag the tracker to the part of the video that you want to track.
In our example, the second tracker is dragged to a stationary fishing ladder on the lake.
3Click the Track Motion button .
If Show tracking path is selected, the paths of both trackers are displayed and the
selected tracker is highlighted.
Tracking paths 193
In the example, Tracker 1 tracks the boy while Tracker 2 tracks the stationary fishing
ladder on the lake. Since the camera is panning to the right, the result shows the path of
Tracker 1 moving to the right and the path of Tracker 2 moving to the left.
4Click OK.
To remove a tracker, select a tracker and click the Remove tracker button .
To rename trackers
1Select a tracker and click the Rename tracker button .
2Enter the new tracker name in the Rename Tracker dialog box.
3Click OK.
Using objects on tracking paths
To add matched objects
1On the Track Motion window, enable Add matched object.
A matched object appears on the Preview Window.
2Adjust the position of the matched object by doing one of the following:
• Choose an option from the Position drop-list.
• Drag the matched object marker to your preferred position in the Preview Window.
3In the Preview Window, drag the corners of the matched object to adjust its size.
194 VideoStudio
4Proceed with motion tracking as specified in previous procedures to generate the
tracking path.
5Click OK.
The Track Motion dialog box closes and a placeholder is added to the Overlay track.
6Browse for the media clip you want from the Library and drag it over the placeholder on
the Timeline. While dragging over the placeholder, press [Ctrl] to snap the new media
clip into the placeholder’s location and replace the clip.
To blur parts of tracked objects
1In the Track Motion dialog box, click the Apply Mosaic button to enable the
mosaic and then click the arrow beside the button to choose a Rectangle or Circle
mosaic.
Note: If you used a multi-point tracker, the shape options are not available because the
shape is dynamic and determined by the movement of the object.
The prospective blurred area will appear in the Preview Window as a grid.
2Adjust the size of the grid to cover parts that you want to blur by dragging the nodes at
the corners of the grid and adjust the value in the Adjust mosaic size box.
Note: Options for matched object will be grayed-out when you enable this feature.
Tracking paths 195
3Proceed with motion tracking as specified in previous procedures to generate the
tracking path.
The area of the tracked object will have a mosaic-like effect when you view the video in
the Preview Window of the main program.
4Click OK.
In combination with motion tracking, this feature is most useful in blurring out elements
that you do not want to show in your video. Some examples of such are blurring out
faces of people to protect their identity and covering vehicle license plates for security
or obscuring company logos that are trademarked.
Using the Path Library
You can add motion behavior to a clip in the main video track or in the overlay track by
dragging a preset path from the Path Library to the clip in the Timeline.
To use a path from the Library
•In the Library, click the Motion Paths category button, choose Basic or Custom from
the Gallery list, and drag a path thumbnail onto a clip in the Timeline.
If you want to adjust the path, right-click the clip in the Timeline, and choose Motion (or
Motion Options) > Customize Motion.
To remove a path from a clip
• In the Timeline, right-clip the clip and choose Motion (or Motion Options) > Remove
196 VideoStudio
Motion.
To save tracking paths in the Track Motion dialog box
1Select a tracking path name and click the Save to Path Library button .
The Save to Path Library dialog box opens.
2Select the folder location for the path.
3Click OK.
Select Export all visible paths to save all the visible tracking paths. All saved tracking
paths will be converted to generic moving paths without the speed and time properties
previously associated with it.
To import paths to the Path Library
1Click the Import path button .
2Browse for the path file and click Open.
To export paths from the Path Library
1Click the Export path button . The Export Path dialog box opens.
2Click the Browse button to select the path file.
3Enter a name for the path folder.
4Click OK.
If you export a project using Smart Package, tracking information in the project is also
exported and the corresponding path folder is automatically generated in the
computer where the smart package is opened.
To reset the Path Library
• Click Settings > Library Manager > Reset Library.
Painting Creator 197
Painting Creator
Painting Creator is a feature of VideoStudio that allows you to record painting, drawing, or
writing strokes as an animation or still image that can be applied to your project as an overlay
effect.
Some examples of Painting Creator projects: Animate a handwritten title, paint a
custom background (still or animated), or animate annotation and match it to a
voiceover.
This section contains the following topics:
• Working with Painting Creator
• Painting Creator workspace
• Switching between Painting Creator modes
• Choosing a background
• How to create animations and images in Painting Creator
• Setting Painting Creator preferences
• Creating and importing custom brushes
• Exporting Painting Creator animations and images
Working with Painting Creator
Painting Creator contains all the tools you need to record and save animations and
drawings.
198 VideoStudio
Painting Creator launches in its own window. You must exit Painting Creator to return to
VideoStudio.
Helpful tips
• When you record an animation, don’t worry about the duration or interruptions as you
change settings or tools—only onscreen brushstrokes are recorded. After you finish
recording, you can manually set the duration you want, previewing it to ensure it’s just
right.
• You can easily reverse a recording after you exit Painting Creator (in the Timeline,
double-click the recording, and in the Options panel, mark the Reverse video check
box). If you know you’re going to reverse the animation, think about how you want to
apply your brushstrokes to reveal the underlying content.
• You can use a still clip from your animation as a background (before or after the
animation clip, for example). For more information about creating a still from the last
frame of your animation, see “To create a still image from an animation” on page 204.
A still image of the animation was inserted to serve as a background for the title. In this
example, the animation clip is reversed, so the painting gradually reveals the main
video.
To launch Painting Creator
•In the VideoStudio Edit workspace, do one of the following:
• Click Tools > Painting Creator.
• On the Timeline toolbar, click the Painting Creator button .
To close Painting Creator
• To close without exporting animations or images, click Close.
For information about exporting before you close, see “Exporting Painting Creator
animations and images” on page 206.
Painting Creator workspace
The tables below list the controls and features in the Painting Creator window.
1Property bar Lets you set the properties for the selected tool, as well as
control the opacity of an underlying image, and clear the
canvas.
2Toolbar Lets you select a tool, view, or choose canvas settings.
3Canvas / Preview
Window
Displays the painting area (your canvas), with or without an
underlying reference background. You can also preview
animation in this area.
4Gallery Contains thumbnails of the animations and still images that
you have created.
Painting Creator 199
Main workspace components
Painting Creator tools and controls
Brush tool: Lets you apply brushstrokes to the canvas. Choose the
brush you want from the Brush Selector on the property bar.
Eyedropper tool: Lets select a color from the canvas.
Eraser tool: Lets you erase brushstrokes from the canvas.
Zoom in and Zoom out buttons: Lets you change the zoom
level of the canvas/preview window.
Actual size: Sets your canvas/preview window to 100% (actual
size), based on the project dimensions.
Fit in window: Sets the zoom level of the canvas so that you can
see the entire canvas in the preview window.
4
3
1
2
200 VideoStudio
Background Image: Lets you access background options,
including a reference image or a plain color. For more
information, see “Choosing a background” on page 201.
Animation mode and Still mode buttons: Let you choose
between capturing an animation or a still image. For more
information, see “Switching between Painting Creator modes” on
page 201.
Preferences button: Opens the Preferences dialog box.
Brush Selector: When the Brush tool is selected, you can click
on the Brush Selector button to choose a brush category, and
then select a specific brush tip.
Reset Brush: Lets you reset all the settings on the property bar
back to their default values with one click.
Texture: Lets you select and apply a texture to your brush tips.
Color picker: Click to set the brush color. There are three modes
to choose from: Swatches, HSL Map, and Sliders (let you enter
specific color values, such as RGB values).
Freehand Strokes: Lets you paint or draw freehand style by
dragging on the canvas.
Straight Line Strokes: Lets you paint or draw straight lines by
clicking to set a start point and end point for a line.
Undo and Redo buttons: Lets you undo or redo brushstrokes
applied to the canvas.
Size Size: Lets you adjust the brush size.
Opacity Opacity: Lets you set a transparency level for the brushstrokes.
Rotation Rotation: Applies rotation (in degrees) to a non-circular brush tip.
*This setting is available only for some brushes.
Step Step: Determines the interval between brush dabs when you drag
across the canvas. Lower values produce a smoother, more
continuous appearance; higher values result in more space
between brush dabs. *This setting is available only for some
brushes.
Head Loading Heading Loading: Simulates how much “paint” is on the brush.
On a blank area of the canvas, lower values result in short brush
strokes; higher values result in longer brush strokes.
*This setting is available only for some brushes.
Background Opacity Background Opacity: Lets you set the transparency of the
background in the preview screen. The background is not
included in the final animation or image, it is used as a reference
only.
Painting Creator 201
Switching between Painting Creator modes
There are two Painting Creator modes to choose from: Animation mode and Still mode.
To choose between Painting Creator modes
• Click the one of the following buttons (only the active mode button displays in the
toolbar).
• Animation mode — lets you record the application of brushstrokes as an
animation. Only the action and result on the canvas is captured (no interruptions are
captured when you change brush or other settings).
• Still mode — lets you create a still image from the brushstrokes applied to the
canvas.
Note: By default, Painting Creator uses Animation mode.
Choosing a background
When you open Painting Creator, by default the canvas/preview area displays a semi-
transparent background based on what is currently displayed in the VideoStudio preview
Clear: Lets you clear the canvas/preview window of all
brushstrokes.
Start recording, Stop recording, Snapshot: Lets you start
and stop recording your brushstrokes as an animation (in
Animation mode). After you stop, the animation is added to the
Gallery and the canvas is cleared.
In Still mode, the Snapshot button displays so you can capture a
PNG image of the canvas.
Thumbnails for animations and still images are added to the
Gallery.
Remove from Gallery: Deletes the animation or image currently
selected in the Gallery.
Duration: Lets you change the duration for the selected
animation in the Gallery.
Play and Stop buttons: Each animation thumbnail in the Gallery
has a Play/Stop button that lets you preview the selected
animation.
OK button: Closes Painting Creator and inserts the selected
Gallery files as animations (.uvp format) or images (.webp format) in
the VideoStudio Library.
Close: Closes the Painting Creator window without exporting
files to the VideoStudio Library.
202 VideoStudio
area. This background serves as a reference only; it does not appear in the final animation
or image that you paint (unless you change your preferences). You can change the
background so that it displays a default color or another image.
For information about changing the default settings for the background, see “Setting
Painting Creator preferences” on page 205.
Background Opacity
You can adjust the Background Opacity value to suit your workflow before or during your
painting session. For example:
• Background Opacity = 0: Plain white background, perfect for painting from scratch.
• Background Opacity = 30: Lets you view enough of the background so you can trace or
determine how your brushstrokes look against the background image.
• Background Opacity = 100: Lets you sample colors from the background image so the
painting colors match the background image.
To change the background
1On the toolbar for the Painting Creator window, click the Background Image
button .
2In the Background Image Options window, choose one of the following:
• Refer to the default background color: Displays a plain background color, based on
the color set in the Preferences (white is the default color).
• Current timeline image: Displays what is currently displayed in the VideoStudio
preview area (based on the position of the scrubber/playhead in the timeline).
• Customize image: Lets you choose any JPEG, PNG, or BMP image to use as a
background.
How to create animations and images in Painting Creator
You can record animations or save still images in the Painting Creator window. You can play
your animations and convert them to still images. To get different types of brushstrokes, you
can adjust your brush settings. You can also use a reference image as you draw.
To create an animated painting
1In the Painting Creator window, ensure that Animation mode is active, and ensure
your canvas/preview area is set up the way you want it.
• On the toolbar, click the Fit in window button to see the entire canvas, or set the
zoom level you want.
Painting Creator 203
• On the property bar, set a value for the Background Opacity if you’re using a reference
image. For more information, see “Choosing a background” on page 201.
2On the toolbar, click the Brush tool, and on the property bar click the Brush Selector
button (note that the icon changes according to the selected brush category).
3Choose a brush category (left side of selector pop-up), then click a specific brush (right
side of pop-up).
4On the property bar, set the texture, color, stroke style, brush size, opacity, and any other
brush settings that you want. The available brush properties vary according to the
selected brush category.
Note: You can apply test brushstrokes to the canvas as you refine your brush settings. To
clear the canvas, click the Clear button on the property bar.
5On the property bar, click the Start recording button.
6On the canvas, apply brushstrokes. You can change tools, brushes, or brush settings as
you work. Only the action on the canvas is captured in the animation.
7When you are finished, click the Stop recording button.
Note: The animation is automatically saved to the Gallery.
8To review your animation, click the Play button on the corresponding Gallery thumbnail.
Note: Playback is slow the first time you play the animation (the progress bar at the
bottom lets you monitor the rendering process). Click Play again, after the initial
rendering, to preview the animation at the default duration.
9If necessary, adjust the duration of the animation by clicking the Duration button
(above the Gallery), and set a new duration value.
Note: When you change the duration, the animation will be re-rendered the next time
you click Play.
You cannot edit an animation after you stop recording.
204 VideoStudio
To create a still image painting
1In the Painting Creator window, ensure that Still mode is active, and ensure your
canvas/preview area is set up the way you want it.
• On the toolbar, click the Fit in window button to see the entire canvas, or set the
zoom level you want.
• On the property bar, set a value for the Background Opacity. For more information,
see “Choosing a background” on page 201.
• On the toolbar, click the Brush tool, and on the property bar click the Brush Selector
button (note that the icon changes according to the selected brush category).
2Choose a brush category (left side of selector pop-up), then click a specific brush (right
side of pop-up).
3On the property bar, set the texture, color, stroke style, brush size, opacity, and any other
brush settings that you want. The available brush properties vary according to the
selected brush category.
4On the canvas, apply brushstrokes. You can change tools, brushes, or brush settings as
you work.
5When you are finished, click the Snapshot button.
Note: The image (PNG format) is automatically saved to the Gallery.
You cannot edit a painting after it is added to the Gallery.
To create a still image from an animation
• In the Gallery, right-click your animation thumbnail and select Transfer animation item
to still.
A still image (PNG format) is added to the Gallery, based on the last frame of the
animation. The original animation is not changed.
You can use the still image as an intro or end clip for your animation in VideoStudio.
To change clip duration
1In the Painting Creator Gallery, select the thumbnail for the animation you want to edit.
2Do one of the following:
• Above the Gallery, click the Duration button .
• Right-click the thumbnail and choose Change duration.
3Type a new value in the Duration box.
4Click OK.
Painting Creator 205
The duration displays in the upper left corner of the animation thumbnail.
Setting Painting Creator preferences
You can change the preferences for Painting Creator. The Preference settings include
default settings for animation duration, background color, background image, project size,
and more.
To change the default Preference settings
1On the toolbar for the Painting Creator window, click the Preference settings
button .
2Change any of the following settings:
• Default macro duration — Lets you set the default duration for the animations you
record (in seconds).
• Default background color — Click the color picker to choose a new default
background color.
• Set reference image as background image — Displays the timeline or custom image
in the background. If not marked, only the background color displays.
• Enable layer mode — When enabled, brushstrokes are saved with a transparent
background. When disabled, the canvas (including the optional reference image) is
saved with the brushstrokes.
• Enable fit to screen automatically — Displays the full canvas when you open the
Painting Creator window.
• Project size — Lets you change the painting dimensions (in pixels).
Creating and importing custom brushes
You can create and save custom brushes in Painting Creator.
You can also import the following brush types:
•.vspbrush files that other users share with you
•.pspbrush files from Corel PaintShop Pro. This includes third-party brushes that have
been imported into Corel PaintShop Pro and converted to .pspbrush files.
To create a custom brush in Painting Creator
1On a clear canvas, apply brushstrokes to create the brush tip shape you want.
Note: It’s best if the shape extends to the edge of the canvas as much as possible— a
small brush tip can look pixelated when the Size setting is increased.
206 VideoStudio
2Click the Brush Selector button , and in the pop-up, click the Create brush tip
button .
3In the Create Brush Tip window, type a brush name in the Name box.
The brush files are stored in the location identified by the Path box.
4Click OK.
The brush is added to the Custom brushes category in the Brush Selector.
To impor t brushes
1Click the Brush Selector button , and in the pop-up, click the Import custom brushes
button .
2In the Import Custom Brushes window, navigate to the brush files that you want to
import. You can import the following file types: .vspbrush, .pspbrush.
3Select one or more brush files, and click Open.
The brushes are added to the Custom brushes category in the Brush Selector.
Exporting Painting Creator animations and images
You can selectively export animations and images that you create in Painting Creator.
Animations are exported to the *.uvp format and images are exported as *.webp files.
To export animations and images to the VideoStudio Library
•In the Painting Creator window, from the Gallery, select the thumbnails for the items that
you want to export and click OK.
VideoStudio imports the selected animations and images to the Library in the currently
selected folder.
FastFlick 207
FastFlick
Corel offers a fast and easy way to create your own movie. You can quickly put together an
impressive project with Corel® FastFlick. Just pick a template, add your media clips, and save
your movie.
This section contains the following topics:
• Creating a FastFlick project
• Selecting a template (FastFlick)
• Adding media clips (FastFlick)
• Editing titles (FastFlick)
• Adding music (FastFlick)
• Applying Pan & Zoom effects (FastFlick)
• Setting movie duration (FastFlick)
• Saving to video files for computer playback (FastFlick)
• Uploading to the Web (FastFlick)
• Editing your movie in VideoStudio (FastFlick)
Creating a FastFlick project
When you launch FastFlick, you can immediately start a new project or open an existing
project for further editing.
To create a FastFlick project
• From the VideoStudio window, click Tools > FastFlick.
The FastFlick window appears.
To open an existing FastFlick project
• In FastFlick, click the Menu arrow > Open Project.
208 VideoStudio
Selecting a template (FastFlick)
FastFlick comes with a number of templates that feature different themes.
To select a template
1Click the Select Your Template tab.
2Select a theme from the drop-list.
You can choose to display all themes or select a specific theme from the list.
3Click a template from the thumbnail list.
4To preview the template, click the Play button .
An orange box marks the selected template. The template thumbnail is also displayed
on the Your Template tab when you open the other tabs.
If you have VideoStudio X9 or later, you can create your own FastFlick templates.
Adding media clips (FastFlick)
You can use photos, video clips, or a combination of media clips when creating your movie.
To add media clips
1Click the Add Your Media tab.
2Click the Add Media button .
The Add Media dialog box opens.
3Select the media files you want to add and click Open.
You can also add media by dragging photo and video files from a Windows Explorer
folder to the FastFlick window.
Editing titles (FastFlick)
FastFlick templates have built-in title clips. You can replace the placeholder text with your
own text, change the font style and color, and even add effects such as shadow and
transparency.
To edit a title
1On the Add Your Media tab, drag the Scrubber to the part of the movie clip marked
with a purple bar.
FastFlick 209
This activates the Edit Title button .
2Click the Edit Title button or double-click the title on the Preview Window.
3To change the font style, select a font from the Font drop-list.
4To change the font color, click the Color button and click a color swatch.
You can also launch the Corel Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker by clicking the
option from the list.
5To add a shadow, enable the Shadow check box.
6To change the shadow color, click the Color button below the check box and click a
color swatch or launch a Color Picker.
7To adjust transparency, click the Transparency down arrow and drag the slider.
You can also click inside the Transparency box and type a new value.
8To move the title, drag the text box to its new position on the screen.
9To finish editing a title, click outside the text box.
Corel VideoStudio offers extended title editing capabilities. To edit titles in Corel
VideoStudio after you finish your project in FastFlick, click the Save and Share tab and
click Edit in VideoStudio.
Adding music (FastFlick)
Most of the templates have built-in music that you can keep or replace. You can add your
own music, delete music, and change the order of the audio files. You can also apply Audio
Normalization to automatically adjust the volume of each music clip to the same level.
To add a background music
1On the Add Your Media tab, click the Edit Music button .
2Under Music Options, click Add Music.
210 VideoStudio
The Add Music dialog box opens.
3Select your audio files and click Open.
To rearrange audio clips
1On the Add Your Media tab, click the Edit Music button.
2Click an audio file in the Music Options list.
3Click the Move up button or the Move down button to change the audio file
order.
To delete an audio file
1On the Add Your Media tab, click the Edit Music button .
2Click an audio file title and click the Delete button .
To apply Audio Normalization
1On the Add Your Media tab, click the Edit Music button .
2Enable the Audio Normalization check box to adjust the volume of each music clip to
the same level.
Applying Pan & Zoom effects (FastFlick)
Make your movie or slideshow more interesting by adding pan and zoom effects to your
photos. FastFlick does the work for you by applying the effect to all the photos in your
project.
To apply Pan & Zoom effects to photos
1On the Add Your Media tab, click the Options button .
2Under Photo Pan & Zoom Options, enable the Smart Pan & Zoom check box.
Setting movie duration (FastFlick)
You can determine the relationship between the duration of your project and the music.
To set movie duration
1On the Add Your Media tab, click the Options button .
FastFlick 211
2Under Movie Duration, choose one of the following options:
• Fit music to movie duration — automatically adjusts the music clip to play until the
movie ends.
• Fit movie to music duration — automatically adjusts the movie clip to play until the
music track ends.
Saving to video files for computer playback (FastFlick)
FastFlick lets you save your movie project to video file formats that you can playback on
computers.
To create a video file for computer playback
1On the Save and Share tab, click the Computer button .
2Click one of the following buttons to view and choose the profile for your video:
• AVI
• MPEG-2
• AVC/H.264
• MPEG-4
• WMV
3In the Profile drop-list, choose an option.
4In the File name box, type a file name.
5In the File location box, specify the location where you want to save the file.
6Click Save Movie.
Uploading to the Web (FastFlick)
Share your movie online by uploading your videos to YouTube or Vimeo. You can access
your accounts from within FastFlick. If you don’t have an existing account, you will be
prompted to create an account.
The first time you log in from FastFlick, you are asked to authorize the connection between
your online account and FastFlick. This authorization allows for the exchange of limited
information related to the successful upload of your video.
As with any video upload, the online site usually requires time to post the video after it has
been uploaded.
Please make sure to abide by the terms of use regarding copyright ownership of video
and music as set by YouTube and Vimeo.
212 VideoStudio
To upload your video to YouTube or Vimeo
1On the Save and Share tab, click the Upload to Web button .
2Click one of the following buttons:
• YouTube
• Vimeo
If you need to sign in, the Log In button appears. Click the button to sign in. If it is the
first time you are signing in, you will be asked to authorize the connection between
VideoStudio and your online account.
3Fill in the necessary information such as your video title, description, privacy settings and
additional tags.
4In the Quality drop-list, select your preferred video quality.
5In the File name box, type a file name.
6In the File location box, specify the location where you want to save a copy of file.
7Click Upload Your Movie.
Editing your movie in VideoStudio (FastFlick)
FastFlick is designed to help you complete a movie in three easy steps. However, you always
have the option to edit your project further in VideoStudio.
To edit a movie in VideoStudio
•On the Save and Share tab, click Edit in VideoStudio.
The project files are automatically placed on the Timeline.
After your FastFlick project is imported into VideoStudio, you can continue editing your
movie just like any VideoStudio project.
For more information, see “Timeline” on page 63.
Highlight Reel 213
Highlight Reel
Highlight Reel creates compilation movies. Boosted by artificial intelligence (AI), it is
designed to analyze a batch of media files and automatically assemble a sampling of the
people and events that you have captured in your photos and videos. With options to
include date titles and a soundtrack, Highlight Reel is perfect for
• an overview—when you want an overview of a large batch of images and video clips
• saving time—when you don’t have time to create a movie from scratch
• getting started—when you’re not sure how to start a movie
Highlight Reel offers automation, but also customization, so you can take control when you
want to highlight specific photos and clips, make simple edits, or explore full editing options
after exporting to VideoStudio.
Whether its a batch of photos and video clips from an evening out, hundreds of photos
from your latest vacation, or random clips from your phone from the past year,
Highlight Reel offers a fun way to revisit the moments you’ve captured.
This section contains the following topics:
• Introduction to Highlight Reel
• Highlight Reel window
• Highlight Reel settings
214 VideoStudio
• How to create a Highlight Reel movie
• Editing a Highlight Reel movie
• Using face detection in Highlight Reel
Introduction to Highlight Reel
Here is some basic information about Highlight Reel:
• The algorithm analyzes the source material, avoiding duplicate content, favoring video
segments and photos that include people, and parses through shooting dates to create a
balanced representation of the source material.
• The length of the compilation depends on the number of source files and the settings
you choose. For example, in Auto mode, a compilation from 40 source files will be
approx. 2 min. long; a compilation from 700 photos will be approx. 10 min. long.
• Source material: You can choose a folder full of unedited photos and videos and let
Highlight Reel go to work on it, or you can hand-pick the media that you want to
include.
• Editing: You can edit the movie as little or as much as you want. Highlight Reel has very
basic editing capabilities. VideoStudio provides a full set of editing tools.
•Layout: Highlight Reel creatively assembles video clips and photos to match the
selected aspect ratio (16:9 is the default). Sometimes backgrounds and duplication are
used to ensure each frame is full. Customizations can always be made after you export to
VideoStudio.
To open Highlight Reel
• At the top of the VideoStudio Library panel, click the Highlight Reel button .
Note: The Highlight Reel button is available only when you select a custom folder in
the media Library (a folder that you have created by clicking the Add a new folder
button ).
If you are prompted to import, click No unless you want import all the files in the current
Library folder—you can import the media you want after you open Highlight Reel.
To close Highlight Reel
•In the Highlight Reel window, click one of the following buttons:
• OK — exports the movie currently in the Timeline to the VideoStudio Library and
closes the Highlight Reel window.
• Cancel — closes the Highlight Reel window without saving or exporting the movie
currently in the Timeline (unless you choose to save when prompted).
Highlight Reel 215
Highlight Reel window
The tables below list the controls and features in the Highlight Reel window.
1Preview Window Displays the a preview of the selected Library item or
playback from the Timeline.
2Navigation area Provides buttons for playback, volume control, and aspect
ratio.
3Timeline Displays the media that has been assembled for the movie.
4Library Contains thumbnails of the video clips and photos that you
have imported to the Highlight Reel window.
Main components
Highlight Reel tools and controls
Folder button: Opens the list of project folders. To pin the list
open, click the Pin button in the upper right corner of the list.
New folder button: Lets you add a new folder to the folder list.
Import Media button: Lets you choose between Import Media
Files and Import Media Folders. You can then navigate to the
corresponding items.
All, Years, Months, Days,
Faces
Sorting options that let you organize the imported items.
4
3
1
2
216 VideoStudio
Highlight Reel settings
Before you create your movie, you choose Movie mode and Movie settings that determine
how your movie will be assembled and what features will be included. For example, you can
choose how the duration of video clips will be determined and whether transitions, titles, or
music will be included.
Movie modes
You can choose from the following Movie modes:
•Auto: The length of each video segment is determined by analyzing the video clip.
Considerations include matching photo and video length to other settings (for example,
Thumbnail Zoom slider: Move the slider to the left or right to
decrease or increase thumbnail size in the Library.
Show Videos/Hide Videos: Filter media by hiding or showing
video files.
Show Photos/Hide Photos: Filter media by hiding or showing
image files.
Show Selected Files Only: Filter media by showing only the
files that have been marked as selected in the Library (as indicated
by a check mark in upper right corner of a thumbnail).
Hide Used Files: Filter media by showing only the files that have
not been added to the movie in the Timeline.
Settings button: Lets you choose Movie mode and Movie
settings. For more information, see “Highlight Reel settings” on
page 210.
Create Use the Create button to build your Highlight Reel movie.
When finished, the movie appears in the Highlight Reel
Timeline.
Standard playback controls are available, including Home,
Previous, Play, Next, End, and Repeat (loop).
The Volume slider lets you adjust the system playback volume. It
does not affect the volume of the exported movie.
Aspect ratio: Lets you choose between 16:9 (default) or 9:16
(portrait orientation).
OK OK button: Closes the Highlight Reel window, exporting the
content of the Timeline as a .vsp file and adding it to the
VideoStudio Library.
Close Close button: Closes the Highlight Reel window without
exporting files to the VideoStudio Library (unless you choose to
do so when prompted).
Highlight Reel 217
if Sync to music beat is enabled). Video segments will typically be 4-8 seconds, and
photos will be approx. 2 seconds.
•Fixed duration: The length of each video clip and photo is determined by the value you
type in the duration box (measured in seconds). Enable the Select one file only per day
check box for projects such as one-second-per-day compilations.
•Manual: The length of each video clip is the same as the original video clip and photos
are inserted at a default duration of 2 seconds. In Manual mode, you have access to
extra editing tools (beside the Navigation area). For more information, see “To multi-trim
a movie in the Highlight Reel window” on page 213.
To choose Highlight Reel mode and settings
1Below the Library panel, click the Settings button and choose one of the following
Movie mode options:
• Auto
• Fixed duration: Type a duration value in the box (measured in seconds).
• Manual
2Choose from the following Movie settings:
• Transitions: Inserts Crossfade transitions between clips.
• Date Tag: Applies year, month, or day titles.
• Background music: Lets you select an audio file to use as a background track. If you
are using Auto mode, you can also enable the Sync to music beat check box if you
want the media transitions to coordinate with the beat of your background music.
How to create a Highlight Reel movie
With an understanding of how Highlight Reel works, and the options and settings available,
you are ready to build your first Highlight Reel movie.
To create a Highlight Reel movie
1Open Highlight Reel (In the VideoStudio Library panel, click the Highlight Reel button
.)
Note: The Highlight Reel button is available only when you select a custom folder in
the media Library (a folder that you have created by clicking the Add a new folder
button ).
2Click the Folder button , and choose a previously created folder, or click the New
Folder button , and type a folder name.
The new folder appears in the folder list and is selected by default.
218 VideoStudio
3If you need to import media, click the Import Media button , choose Import Media
Files or Import Media Folder, navigate to and select the media you want, and click
Open.
Supported media files are added to the Highlight Reel Library.
4If you want to select specific videos and photos for your movie, use the filter and sorting
features to find the media you want, and click the upper-right corner of each thumbnail
to add a check mark.
5Click the Settings button , and choose a Movie mode and Movie settings. For more
information, see “Highlight Reel settings” on page 210.
Note: Auto takes full advantage of the automation features.
6Click Create.
The compilation process takes several seconds or minutes, depending on the size and
number of media files it must analyze.
The movie appears in the Timeline when processing is complete.
7Use the playback controls in the Navigation area to review your movie.
8If you want to make any edits, you can do so in the Timeline. For more information, see
“Editing a Highlight Reel movie” on page 212.
9When you ready to export your movie, click OK at the bottom of the window.
The movie is exported as a .vsp file and is added to the VideoStudio Library.
Editing a Highlight Reel movie
You can perform basic editing tasks in the Highlight Reel Timeline. For example, you can
adjust the duration of a photo or trimmed video clip, you can change the order of the items,
and you can delete or insert items.
If your Movie mode is set to Manual, you can also select specific video segments and
photos in the Timeline and only the selections will be exported to the final movie. Shortcut
keys make it easy to perform this kind of multi-trim editing during playback.
When you select segments and photos for export (multi-trim and Pick Photo), only the
selections surrounded by the dashed yellow outline are included in the exported movie.
More advanced editing can be accomplished after you export your movie to VideoStudio.
The advantage of performing some basic editing in Highlight Reel is that it offers a
simplified view of the movie components, making it easier to move, delete, and trim.
Highlight Reel 219
To edit a movie in the Highlight Reel window
• After you create your movie, in the Highlight Reel Timeline, do any of the following:
• Delete: Right-click an item in the Timeline and choose Delete.
• Insert: Drag an item from the Library to the position you want in the Timeline.
• Move: Select an item in the Timeline, and drag it right or left to drop it in a new
position.
• Trim: Select an item in the Timeline, position your pointer near the edge, and when the
single arrow appears, drag to change the duration of the item. A green line appears as
you drag. The line changes to red if it reaches its trim limit.
If you enabled Sync to music beat (Movie mode set to Auto), editing the compilation
will affect synchronization.
To multi-trim a movie in the Highlight Reel window
1Ensure the Movie mode is set to Manual (click the Settings button and choose the
Manual option.
2In the Timeline, position the scrubber at the beginning frame of the first segment, and
click the Mark-in button .
3Position the scrubber where you want the segment to end, and click the Mark-out
button .
The selected segment is outlined with a yellow dashed line.
4Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have selected all the segments that you want keep.
Only the selected segments will be exported.
You can also mark segments in and out, by pressing [F3] and [F4] while playing the
video.
To specify which project photos you want to export
1Ensure the Movie mode is set to Manual (click the Settings button and choose the
Manual option.
2In the Timeline, click the photo that you want to include in the exported project.
3Click the Pick Photo button .
The selected photo is outlined with a yellow dashed line.
4Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have selected all the photos that you want keep.
You can also pick photos, by pressing P while playing the video.
220 VideoStudio
Using face detection in Highlight Reel
You can sort your media files by using face detection to help identify people in your photos
and video clips.
If there are multiple faces in a media file, the file can be tagged with the name of each person
so that the file thumbnail appears in more than one face group.
You can use Faces to sort your media. Hover over a thumbnail to see which face groups
it belongs to.
To run face detection on your media files
1In the Highlight Reel window, open the folder with the media files that you want to
analyze.
2At the top of the Library, click Faces.
It takes a few moments the first time you sort a media folder by Faces. Wait until the
progress bar indicates that the process is finished before you continue.
3Click any of the face groups that appear along the top edge of the Library.
4Under a group, click Add Name, and type the name of the person identified in that
group.
5In the lower section of the Library, review all the thumbnails for this group, clicking any
thumbnails that you want to view or playback in the Preview Window. If you need to
remove a file from the group, right-click the thumbnail and choose Remove from this
group.
6Repeat steps 3-5 for the people you want to identify.
To manage faces assigned to a group
1In the Highlight Reel window, open the folder with media that you have previously
sorted using face detection.
2At the top of the Library, click Faces.
3Along the top of the Library, click any of the face groups.
Highlight Reel 221
4In the lower section of the Library, select one or more thumbnails, right-click one of the
selected thumbnails, and choose any of the following:
• Add to another group: Lets you add the thumbnail(s) to other groups by selecting one
or more groups in the Add to Group window.
• Move to another group: Lets you move the thumbnail(s) to a different group by
selecting a group in the Move to Another Group window.
• Remove from this group: Lets you remove the thumbnail(s) from the group,
automatically moving the selection to the Others group.
• Delete: Removes the file from the Library.
• Delete All: Removes all the files in that folder from the Library.
If you’re not sure if a thumbnail belongs to more than one group, hover over the
thumbnail until a tooltip displays—the group names it is tagged with will display here.
You can also add thumbnails to a face group by selecting the thumbnails in the lower
part of the Library, and dragging them over a face group thumbnail at the top of the
Library.
To manage face groups
1In the Highlight Reel window, open the folder with media that you have previously
sorted using face detection.
2At the top of the Library, click Faces.
3Along the top of the Library, click a face group, and do any of the following:
• Change the group name: Click the name below the group thumbnail and type a new
name.
• Delete a group: Right-click the group thumbnail and choose Remove this group.
• Merge a group: Right-click the group thumbnail, choose Merge with groups, and
select a group for merging.
• Create a new group: In the lower part of the Library, select the thumbnails that you
want to add to a new group, and drag them to the plus sign (Drag and drop files here)
in the upper right corner of the Library. You can then select the new group, click Add
Name, and type the name you want.
222 VideoStudio
Making FastFlick templates 223
Making FastFlick templates
You can create FastFlick templates in VideoStudio. Unlike Instant Project templates, which
are essentially previously saved static projects, FastFlick templates are designed to
automatically expand or contract according to the number of photos and videos that a user
drops into the template. This means a system of rules is required to control what to change,
what to keep, and what to repeat. FastFlick templates are very easy to use, but creating them
requires knowledge and planning.
This section contains the following topics:
• Terminology for FastFlick templates
• Rules for creating FastFlick templates
• Creating FastFlick templates
Terminology for FastFlick templates
The following terminology is used when creating and describing FastFlick templates.
•Segment — each image or video clip added to the main track creates a segment (this
includes images or videos from the Graphic Library, such as backgrounds or objects). You
can enhance your segment by adding elements such as overlays, titles, and transitions.
You can also apply effects to elements in your segment. It’s important to think of a
segment as an independent block. This is achieved by ensuring that elements within the
segment do not extend beyond the duration of the segment’s image or video in the
main track (the Music track is the only exception).
•Element — an element can be a transition, title, object, or any piece of media. It is a way
of describing the individual pieces used to build a template segment.
•Attributes — the properties that you assign to template elements that determine their
behavior.
•Placeholder — an attribute that is assigned to temporary media that will be swapped
out for user media. Placeholders are repeatable by default (to accommodate the
unspecified number of media that a user can add to a template).
Optional is an attribute you can assign to a placeholder if you feel that the element is not required if there is not
enough user content. For example, you can apply Optional to a placeholder in the main video track if the segment can
be dropped when user content runs out (rather than repeat user content to complete the sequence).
224 VideoStudio
•Static — an attribute assigned to a template element that you want to keep in the
current position. When the media in the main video track is marked as static, the
segment won’t repeat in the sequence—it will display only in the current position (for
example, in a beginning or end segment).
Each image or video clip added to the main video track creates a segment (indicated
by the orange boxes). Each segment can have multiple elements (indicated by the red
ovals).
The FastFlick Template Designer dialog box lets you assign attributes to the elements
in your template. To open the dialog box, right-click a template element in the Timeline
and choose FastFlick Template Designer.
Rules for creating FastFlick templates
For FastFlick templates to work correctly, you must follow some rules. Because you create
the templates in the same workspace that you use for all projects, it’s easy to break the rules
without realizing it. It’s best to review the rules before you save your template and always
test your saved template in FastFlick before you share it.
Making FastFlick templates 225
Rules
1Segments: Ensure that the elements in a segment do not cross between segments.
2 Placeholders: You must have at least one placeholder in your template.
3Audio: Use only Music Track #1 for template audio. Audio files are the only elements that
can extend beyond a single segment (for example, you can have one song that extends
the entire length of your template project).
4Titles: Use only Title Track #1 for titles
5Transitions: Use transitions only at the end of segments that are not the first or last
segment in your template. Although technically transitions bridge segments, think of a
transition as belonging to the media that comes before it.
6Group: If you want user media to appear in more than one position, you must assign a
matching Group number to the placeholders. For example, the same piece of user media
can be used in an intro overlay and in the main part of a slideshow if you assign the same
Group number attribute to the corresponding placeholders.
The rules above are basic rules that will get you started—there are some exceptions. For
inspiration and to gain a better understanding of what different attribute settings can do,
open existing FastFlick templates in VideoStudio and review the attribute settings for the
elements.
The project above has five segments. Blue areas indicate the first and last segment and
orange areas indicate the three middle segments. The attributes chosen for this project
ensure that the blue areas appear only once (beginning segment and end segment) and
the orange segments will repeat in sequence until all the user media is accommodated.
User media that appears in the small intro overlays will also appear as part of the main
slideshow.
Transitions between middle
segments only.
Segment - no element
extends beyond video
track media except
Music.
Attribute: Static (element doesn’t
change and the segment won’t
repeat - stays put)
Attributes (overlay elements):
Placeholder, Group (number
assigned to each placeholder
to match one of the middle
segment placeholders)
Attributes (middle
segments): Placeholder,
Optional, Group
(number assigned to
each placeholder to
match one of the
overlay placeholders in
the first segment
226 VideoStudio
Creating FastFlick templates
You can approach FastFlick template creation in different ways: you can modify an existing
FastFlick template, convert an existing project to a template, use Instant Project components,
or build a template from scratch. For your first project, it is recommended that you build a
template from scratch because it is a good way to learn the template rules. Reviewing
existing FastFlick templates is a good way to get inspiration.
In general, FastFlick templates will have a beginning, a middle, and an end. Although
technically you can have only one segment in your template, it takes several segments to
define a look and feel for a template.
Here are some things to think about when creating your template:
• What are the anchor elements (things that stay the same)? For example, do you have a
beginning segment and end segment? If so, what elements within those segments stay
the same? Will these segments include static placeholders (user content that does not
repeat)?
• How many segments do you want to create? Keep in mind that segments with
placeholders repeat in sequence until all the user media is accommodated (unless
marked as Static)
• Which segments are optional (can be dropped when the user content is done)?
To create a template
1In the VideoStudio Edit workspace, build your template, following the FastFlick template
rules. Ensure that the elements for each segment do not overlap (with the exception of
audio clips on the Music 1 track).
2Right-click an element and choose FastFlick Template Designer.
3In the FastFlick Template Designer dialog box, choose the attributes that you want to
apply to the element.
4Repeat steps 3-4 for each element.
5Click File > Save, and type a file name.
6Click File > Export as Template > FastFlick Template. Verify the Template path and
Template folder name.
If you want the folder name to be different from your file name, type a new name in the
Template folder name box.
7In the Category list, choose a group for your template.
8Click OK.
Making FastFlick templates 227
If you include video clip placeholders in your template, the length of the user video clip
will be constrained to the length of the corresponding placeholder clip if an effect filter
is applied to the placeholder clip.
228 VideoStudio
Stop motion animation 229
Stop motion animation
The Stop Motion function of the VideoStudio lets you create animated films by capturing still
images grabbed from a live source, such as a video camera, webcam, or DSLR. The result is
a collection of sequential images, and a project file that you can use to create your stop
motion movie.
This section contains the following topics:
• How to create a stop motion project
• Stop motion settings
• Opening and importing files for stop motion
• Using the DSLR Enlarge Mode
How to create a stop motion project
The steps below guide you through a basic workflow for a stop motion project. Before you
start, it’s best to have all your materials ready and have your shooting area set up with the
lighting you need. If you are using a DSLR that is supported in VideoStudio, set your camera
to Manual mode. A tripod is recommended.
230 VideoStudio
Familiarize yourself with the settings in the Stop Motion window before you start. For more,
see “Stop motion settings” on page 230.
To create a stop motion project
1If using an external camera to capture your stop motion project, ensure that the camera
is plugged into your computer and is on, ready to capture photos. Set the camera to
manual mode.
2In VideoStudio, open the Stop Motion window by doing one of the following:
• In the Edit workspace, click the Record/Capture button on the Timeline toolbar,
and click the Stop Motion button .
• In the Capture workspace, click Stop Motion.
3Click the Create button, and from the drop-list in the upper-right corner of the window,
choose the camera you want to use as your capture device (displays supported cameras
that are connected to the computer and switched on).
4Do one of the following:
• On your camera, manually choose the best settings for your stop motion scene and
adjust the focus (can set the lens to MF to focus manually).
• If you have a compatible camera (many Canon and Nikon DSLRs are supported), click
the DSLR settings tab and choose the settings for your camera. You can then focus the
camera manually or set the lens to AF mode, and in VideoStudio, enable Show Focus
to display the onscreen controls. Click Auto Focus or Manual Focus. For Auto Focus,
drag the rectangle to the area of focus. The camera will automatically adjust the focus.
5Type your Project Name, and choose a Capture Folder and a Save to Library location.
6When you know what kind of motion you want to make, click the Stop motion settings
tab, and choose the settings you want.
7When you have the subject set up, click the Capture Image button. If you are using Auto
Capture, this will initiate the capture intervals you set.
8Move your subject the way you want, and continue capturing an image for each
movement. Each capture displays in the thumbnail tray at the bottom of the window.
9When you are ready to review the frames, click the Play button below the preview to
review the movie. In the thumbnail tray, select any of the thumbnails and right-click to
copy or delete a thumbnail.
10 When you are finished, click the Save button at the bottom of the window to return to
the main application window.
Stop motion settings
The following settings are available in the Stop Motion window:
Stop motion animation 231
•Image Duration — Lets you choose the exposure time for each image. A higher frame
rate results in a shorter exposure time for each image.
•Capture Resolution — Lets you adjust the screen capture quality. Options vary
according to the settings on your capture device.
•Auto Capture — You can click Enable auto capture to configure the program to
capture automatically using preset intervals. Click the Set Time button to adjust the
Capture Frequency and Total Capture Duration settings.
•Onion Skin — Lets you move the slider from left to right to control the opacity of the
new captured image and the previously captured frame.
•Grid — Lets you display an overlay that helps you gauge movement. The
interval (spacing) for the grid types is determined by the Time Across setting. The value
(seconds) determines how many suggested captures to make, as indicated by the space
between intervals. Select any of the three types of placement tools in the Grid area:
•Line: Drag across the screen to set a line with nodes that mark intervals. Look for the
pink node to find the suggested alignment for your next capture.
•Grid: Click the preview area to display a grid overlay onscreen
•Circles: Click the preview area to place the center point. A circle pattern displays
onscreen.
Opening and importing files for stop motion
You can open a stop motion project that you saved previously. You can also import images
that you have captured in advance. For example, a series of photos shot with your DSLR on
auto/continuous mode is a good source for stop motion animation projects.
To open an existing stop motion animation project
1Click Open and browse for the stop motion animation project that you want to work on.
Note: Stop motion animation projects created in VideoStudio are saved in the .uisx
format.
2Click Open to activate the project.
To import images into a stop motion animation project
1Click Import and browse for the photos that you want to include in your stop motion
animation projects.
Note: If photos do not appear in the folder, click Browse.
2Click Open.
Your photos are automatically included in the stop motion animation project.
232 VideoStudio
Using the DSLR Enlarge Mode
VideoStudio mimics the camera viewfinder and gives you quick access to DSLR features and
settings.
Part Description
1 — Mode Displays information on the selected camera mode.
2 — Image quality Lets you set the image size and quality.
3 — Metering mode Lets you set the metering mode by selecting from your
camera’s preset options.
4 — White balance Lets you set the white balance by selecting from your
camera’s preset options.
5 — Focus indicator Displays information on the selected focus setting.
6 — Show focus Displays live view focus guides on the screen.
7 — Aperture Displays the aperture settings of the camera. This will be
disabled when the DSLR is in P or Tv mode.
8 — Shutter speed Displays the shutter speed settings of the camera. This will
be disabled when the DSLR is in P or Av mode.
9 — ISO Lets you adjust the ISO setting by selecting from your
camera’s preset options.
10 — Live view focus guides Lets you adjust the focus area by clicking on the arrows or
dragging the focus area box.
11 — Ev Lets you choose the exposure value compensation setting.
12 — Onion skin Lets you control the opacity of the new captured image and
the previously captured frame by moving the slider.
13 — Auto capture Enables the auto capture feature.
14 — Capture resolution Lets you set the image resolution. You can choose from the
preset options or use the settings on your DSLR.
15 — Image duration Lets you set the exposure time for each image.
2
3
13
1
12
4
5
6
7
8911
14
15
10
Stop motion animation 233
To activate DSLR Enlarge Mode
1In the Stop Motion window, click the DSLR Enlarge Mode button
234 VideoStudio
Multi-Camera editing 235
Multi-Camera editing
The Multi-Camera Editor lets you create professional-looking video compilations from
footage of events that have been captured on different cameras, from different angles.
The easy multi-view workspace lets you synchronize the clips and edit on the fly, as the video
clips play back simultaneously—up to *six cameras. With a simple click, you can switch from
one video clip to another in the same way a broadcast studio switches from one camera to
another to capture a different angle or element of a scene.
Footage can be captured on a wide range of video recording devices, such as action
cameras, drone cameras, DSLRs, or smartphones. You can also include audio captured
independently on a microphone.
*Number of cameras depends on the version of the software you have.
This section contains the following topics:
• The Multi-Camera Editor workspace
• Basic steps in multi-camera editing
• Importing video and audio clips into the Multi-Camera Editor
• Synchronizing video and audio clips in multi-camera projects
•Choosing an audio source for your multi-camera project
• Editing multiple clips to create a multi-camera compilation
• Adding picture-in-picture (PIP) in the Multi-Camera Editor
• Managing multi-camera source files
• Saving and exporting your multi-camera project
• Using Smart Proxy with the Multi-Camera Editor
The Multi-Camera Editor workspace
The image below identifies the main features of the Multi-Camera Editor.
236 VideoStudio
Toolbar, playback, and other controls
The controls found in the workspace are listed below.
The main toolbar includes the following controls:
Camera Number — Lets you set the multi-view pane to show four or six cameras,
depending on your version of the software.
Source Sync Type — Lets you synchronize the clips. For more information,
see “Synchronizing video and audio clips in multi-camera projects” on page 238.
Main Audio — Lets you select a preferred audio source. For more
information, see “Choosing an audio source for your multi-camera project” on page 239.
Split Clip — Lets you split a clip into segments. For more information, see “To split a clip
in the Multi-Camera Editor” on page 242.
Set/Remove Marker — Lets you add markers on the Camera tracks for editing
purposes, such as audio syncing.
Multi-view pane Main preview pane
Timeline
Multi-Camera and PIP tracks
Source Sync Type
Main Audio Scrubber
Toolbar and playback controls
Multi-Camera editing 237
Transition and Duration — Lets you apply a transition between clips in the
Multi-Camera track and set the duration for the transition. For more information, see “To add
a transition between multi-camera segments” on page 242.
The main preview pane includes the following controls:
Rotate Left and Rotate Right — Let you rotate clips in the Camera tracks before you
add them to your Multi-Camera track or your PIP track. Note: Only unlocked tracks can be
rotated.
Playback bar with Home, Previous Frame, Play, Next Frame, and End
buttons.
Loop — Lets you play the selected track continuously by looping back to the start when
it reaches the end.
Set Volume — Lets you adjust the audio volume for playback.
Timecode control — Lets you view and set the time/frame that appears in the
main preview pane and where the scrubber is set in the timeline. Click the arrows or a click
number value to set a time/frame.
The timeline includes the following controls:
Source Manager — Lets you add and remove clips. For more information, see
“Managing multi-camera source files” on page 243.
Show/Hide Audio Waveform View — Lets you view the audio waves for Camera and
Audio tracks.
Lock/Unlock — Appears on individual tracks. Locking tracks is recommended after
you synchronize them.
Include/Exclude from Synchronization — Lets you determine which tracks are
included in the synchronization process.
Mute/Unmute — Lets you turn the audio off (mute) or on (unmute) for the selected
audio track.
Zoom to Timeline — Located in the lower left corner of the timeline, this control lets you
expand or compress your project so you can view the whole project in the timeline.
Zoom Level slider — Drag the slider or click the Zoom in (plus sign) or
Zoom out (minus sign) to change the zoom level for your project. This is particularly helpful
when editing individual segments in the Multi-Camera track.
The following general controls appear in the upper-left corner of the application window:
Settings — Lets you access the Proxy Manager and Save As. For more information, see
“Using Smart Proxy with the Multi-Camera Editor” on page 244 and “To save your multi-
camera project” on page 244.
238 VideoStudio
Undo and Redo — Lets you undo or redo most actions in the Multi-Camera Editor.
Basic steps in multi-camera editing
The following steps provide a basic overview of the multi-camera editing process.
1Import the video and audio clips that you want to use into the VideoStudio Library.
Typically these are multiple clips that capture the same event, at the same time.
2Choose the clips in the Library and import them into the Multi-Camera Editor.
3Synchronize the clips across the timeline. You can do this automatically if all the clips
have audio, but there are a range of methods you can use for synchronization.
4Choose the audio you want to keep (if you are using the original audio). You can choose
a separate audio track as well.
5Start building your multi-camera compilation. You can play all the clips simultaneously,
and in the multi-view pane, click the “Camera” that you want to show. You can switch
clips as many times as you like. The selected footage displays in the main preview pane.
You can then review your project in the Multi-Camera track and fine-tune it.
6Save and exit the Multi-Camera Editor to return to VideoStudio and output the project.
Note: It’s recommended that you finish your multi-camera editing before you exit the
Multi-Camera Editor. Changes that you make to your project in another editor might
not be supported if you re-open the project in the Multi-Camera Editor. This means that
some changes will be reverted.
Importing video and audio clips into the Multi-Camera Editor
The first step in creating a multi-camera project is to import your clips into the Multi-Camera
Editor. In most cases, this will be a selection of clips from the same event that have been
imported to the VideoStudio Library.
You can work with up to six video clips at one time and include up to two independent audio
clips.
To import video clips into the Multi-Camera Editor
1In the VideoStudio Library, select all the clips you want to use.
2Do one of the following:
• On the timeline toolbar, click the Multi-Camera Editor button .
• Right-click a selected clip and choose Multi-Camera Editor.
Synchronizing video and audio clips in multi-camera projects
You can synchronize your video and audio clips so that they are all aligned to the same
moment in time. The easiest way to do this is to let the Multi-Camera Editor analyze the
Multi-Camera editing 239
audio for each of the clips and sync the clips automatically. If your recordings are planned,
you can use a special audio signal, such as clapping your hands (similar function to using a
clapper board in professional shoots). Some events have natural audio cues that help the
sync process, such as music performances or sporting events with a start signal.
You can also synchronize the clips by using markers, shooting time, or you can adjust them
manually by dragging the clips in the timeline to the timecode you want. For example, you
could use a common visual element, such as a flash to sync videos manually. These methods
are helpful if your video footage doesn’t include audio or the audio waveforms within the
clips are difficult to sync, or you simply prefer to align the clips manually.
In some cases you might need to use a combination of the synchronization options,
depending on your source footage.
To synchronize video and audio clips in the Multi-Camera Editor
1After importing your clips to the Multi-Camera Editor, choose one of the following
options from the Source Sync Type drop-list on the toolbar:
• Audio — Click the Sync button next to the drop-list to synchronize the clips in the
timeline. Note: Your video clips must include audio to use this option.
• Marker — Select a clip in the timeline, play the clip or scrub to the position you want
by using a visual cue, and click the Set/Remove Marker button on the toolbar to
add a marker. After a marker has been added to each clip, click the Sync button on
the toolbar to align the clips according to the markers.
• Shooting Date/Time — Click the Sync button to synchronize the clips according
the shooting date and time as indicated by the metadata recorded by the camera.
Note: The clocks must be in sync on the cameras to get accurate results.
• Manual — In the timeline, drag each clip to the position you want by using a visual
cue.
Note: If there are clips that you want to exclude from the synchronization process, click
the Exclude from Synchronization button on the corresponding track. Click the
button again (Enable for Synchronization ) to include the track.
Tip: After you synchronize your clips, you can use the Lock buttons on the
individual tracks to ensure that the tracks stay synchronized during the editing process.
Choosing an audio source for your multi-camera project
After you import and synchronize your clips in the Multi-Camera Editor, you can make some
decisions about the audio for your project. For example, if you have four video clips, and they
240 VideoStudio
all include audio, it is recommended that you listen to each clip individually, and choose the
one that has the best sound quality. You can also choose to use a separate audio clip.
Other options let you use the audio from all clips, none of the clips, or switch audio (Auto)
when you switch cameras, a choice you might make to take advantage of the audio captured
with sport or other action footage.
By default, the audio for Camera 1 is selected.
To choose an audio source for your multi-camera project
1With your clips displaying in the Multi-Camera Editor timeline, on the toolbar, click the
Main Audio box and choose a Camera or Audio clip. Click Play to listen the quality
of the audio for each clip.
2Choose the Camera or Audio clip that you want to use for your project. The audio from
all other tracks will be muted.
Other options include:
• Auto — Switches the audio to match the clip that you are playing
• None — No audio is included in the multi-camera project. You can add your audio in
VideoStudio, after you leave the Multi-Camera Editor.
• All Cameras — Plays audio from all clips, simultaneously
Tip: If you plan to edit the audio after you exit the Multi-Camera Editor, please note
that the setting you choose in Main Audio determines what tracks will be available as
audio tracks in VideoStudio.
Editing multiple clips to create a multi-camera compilation
After you import and synchronize your clips in the Multi-Camera Editor, and choose your
audio settings, you can start editing your clips to create a multi-camera compilation. The
multi-view pane in the Multi-Camera Editor helps make this task fun and easy. Much like a
DJ switches and blends tracks to create a new music compilation, the Multi-Camera Editor
lets you visually switch between video tracks and blend them together with transitions.
If you notice that playback is slow or lacks smoothness, you can check the Smart Proxy
settings. For more information, see “Using Smart Proxy with the Multi-Camera Editor” on
page 244.
After you build your basic compilation using the multi-view pane and the main preview pane,
you can fine-tune your project in the Multi-Camera track and take advantage of editing
features, such as transitions and a clip splitting tool. Note that some types of edits, such as
rotating a clip, must be done in the individual Camera tracks before you add the clips to your
compilation in the Multi-Camera track.
Multi-Camera editing 241
To create a multi-camera compilation
1With your clips in the Multi-Camera Editor timeline, click the Play button below the
main preview pane.
Footage from all cameras can be viewed simultaneously in the multi-view pane.
2To start building your project, as the videos play in the multi-view pane, click the preview
for the camera that you want to show.
The footage from the selected camera displays in the main preview pane.
The multi-view pane appears to the left of the main preview pane. Footage from all
cameras can be viewed simultaneously in the multi-view pane.
3To switch cameras, click a different camera preview in the multi-view pane. You can
switch cameras as many times as you like. You can review your project in the Multi-
Camera track.
The Multi-Camera track in the timeline displays the camera segments in your
compilation.
If you want to adjust the zoom level for the Multi-Camera track, drag the zoom level
slider in the lower left corner of the timeline.
4After you have completed a first pass using the multi-view pane, you can refine the
timing for a switch in the Multi-Camera track by playing your project or scrubbing to
the position that you want to edit, clicking a camera segment and dragging the edge
until the frame where you want the switch to occur appears in the main preview pane.
242 VideoStudio
To switch a segment in the Multi-Camera track to a different Camera, right-click the
segment and choose a different Camera from the context menu or click the camera
preview in the multi-view pane.
To add a transition between multi-camera segments
1In the Multi-Camera track, click a segment.
2On the toolbar, click the Transition button . The button has a yellow outline when
active and a transition icon (“AB”) appears in the timeline
If the button is grayed out, gently drag the edge of a segment by a small amount to
reactivate the button.
A Crossfade transition is applied by default.
3On the toolbar, type a time in the Duration box for the transition.
Tip: You can add black or blank segments to your project. You can change a
segment that is already in the Multi-Camera track to a black or a blank by right-
clicking the segment and choosing Black or Blank. You can apply a transition
between a video segment and a Black segment. To add a black or blank segment
while playing your project, instead of clicking a camera preview in the multi-view
pane, click the Black (B) or Blank (0) swatch to the right of the camera previews.
To split a clip in the Multi-Camera Editor
1In the timeline, select a clip in the Multi-Camera or PIP track and click Play or drag the
scrubber to the position where you want to make the cut.
2Click the Split Clip button.
Note: Splitting a clip is useful when you want to replace part of a segment with a
different camera, essentially adding another switch.
Adding picture-in-picture (PIP) in the Multi-Camera Editor
You can add a picture-in-picture (PIP) effect to your multi-camera project. PIP lets you play
a video in one area of the screen while the main video plays in the background.
Multi-Camera editing 243
The image above illustrates the concept of picture-in-picture (PIP).
To add a picture-in-picture (PIP) effect to your multi-camera project
1After you create your multi-camera compilation in the Multi-Camera track, click the Play
button or scrub to the position in the Multi-Camera track where you want to add a
PIP effect.
2In the timeline, click the circle on the PIP track to activate the track.
The circle will have a red fill when active .
3In the multi-view pane, click the preview for the Camera you want to use.
The segment is added to the PIP track.
4To set the end point for the segment, in the PIP track, click the end of the segment and
drag it to the position you want in the timeline.
5To choose a corner for the PIP, click the Change PIP Position button on the PIP
track and choose the position you want.
The PIP position can be seen in the main preview pane.
Managing multi-camera source files
You can use the Source Manager to add and remove video and audio clips from tracks in
your multi-camera project. You can also view information about the clips, such as the
duration of the clip, clip location, and you can lock or unlock tracks.
To add, remove or manage clips with the Source Manager
1In the upper left corner of the timeline, click the Source Manager button .
2In the Source Manager dialog box, do any of the following:
• Click the Lock/Unlock button for a track to unlock a track for editing or to lock a track
to prevent editing.
244 VideoStudio
• To add a clip to a track, select a track, click the Add Clips button , navigate to the
clip you want to add, and click Open. The clip appears in the numbered list for the
track.
• To delete clips from a track, select a track, in the list of clips for that track, mark the
check box next to the clips that you want to delete, and click the Delete button .
Saving and exporting your multi-camera project
When you finish building your multi-camera project, you can save it so that it can be edited,
exported, and shared from VideoStudio.
Note: It’s recommended that you finish your multi-camera editing before you exit the
Multi-Camera Editor. Changes that you make to your project in VideoStudio might not
be supported if you re-open the project in the Multi-Camera Editor. This means that
some changes will be reverted.
To save your multi-camera project
• Click the OK button at the bottom of the window to save your project to the current
name (as indicated in the upper-right corner of the window). This also closes the Multi-
Camera Editor.
If you want to rename your project, before you exit, click the Settings button ,
choose Save As, and type a name in the Project name box.
Your multi-camera project appears in the VideoStudio Library.
To open your multi-camera project (.vsp) in VideoStudio, in the Edit workspace, drag
your multi-camera project from the Library to the Timeline. By default, the project
appears as a composite clip. To expand the clip to work with individual tracks, hold the
Shift key when you drag the project from the Library and drop it in the Timeline.
Using Smart Proxy with the Multi-Camera Editor
The main purpose of Smart Proxy is to provide a more fluid editing and previewing
experience when working with large, high resolution video files.
Smart Proxy creates lower resolution working copies of larger source files. These smaller
files are called “proxy” files. Using proxy files speeds up editing of high resolution projects
(for example, projects that have HDV and AVCHD source files).
Smart Proxy can be set and adjusted in the VideoStudio workspaces or in the Multi-Camera
Editor. For more information, see “Using Smart Proxy for a faster, smoother editing
experience” on page 42.
Save and share 245
Save and share
With your movie project finished, it’s time to save and share it. When you save your project,
all the files are combined to create a single video file in a process called rendering.
You can save your movie as a video file that can be played on a computer or a mobile device,
burn your project to a disc complete with menus, or upload your movie directly to a YouTube
or Vimeo account.
This section contains the following topics:
• Choosing a sharing option
• Saving to video files for computer playback
• Saving to video files for mobile devices
• Saving a track as an alpha channel video
• Saving HTML5 video files
• Uploading to the Web
• Creating 3D video files
• Creating video files from part of a project (trimmed)
• Creating sound files
• Working with custom profiles in the Share workspace
Choosing a sharing option
VideoStudio provides the following sharing categories:
•Computer — Save to a file format that lets you play your movie on computers. You can
also use this option to save the video soundtrack to an audio file. For more information,
see “Saving to video files for computer playback” on page 246 and “Creating sound files”
on page 253.
•Device — Save to a file format that lets you play your movie on mobile devices, game
consoles, or cameras. For more information, see “Saving to video files for mobile
devices” on page 247.
•HTML5 — If you chose File > New HTML5 project at the start of your project or
opened an HTML5 project, this output option becomes available in the Share workspace.
This format is compatible with a broad range of browsers, including Safari. For more
information, see “Saving HTML5 video files” on page 249.
246 VideoStudio
•Web — Upload your movie directly to YouTube or Vimeo. Your movie is saved in an
optimal format for the site you choose. For more information, see “Uploading to the
Web” on page 250.
•Disc — Save and burn your movie to a disc or SD card. For more information, see “Burn
discs” on page 255.
•3D Movie — Save your movie to a 3D playback format. For more information,
see“Creating 3D video files” on page 251.
•VideoStudio Project — If you chose File > New HTML5 project at the start of your
project, you can save a copy in the native VideoStudio format (*.vsp). For more
information, see “To save an HTML5 project as a Corel VideoStudio Pro project (VSP)” on
page 250.
Saving to video files for computer playback
VideoStudio lets you save your movie project to video file formats that you can playback on
computers.
Before rendering your entire project into a movie file, make sure you first save it as a
VideoStudio project file (*.vsp) by clicking File > Save or Save As. This lets you return
to your project at any time and make edits.
To create a video file for computer playback
1In the Share workspace, click the Computer button .
2Click one of the following buttons to view and choose the profile for your video:
• AVI
• MPEG-2
• AVC/H.264
• MPEG-4
• WMV
• MOV
• Audio
• Custom
If you want to use the Project Settings for the video file, enable the Same as Project
Settings check box located above the buttons.
3In the Profile or Format drop-list, choose an option.
If you want to create a custom profile, click the Create Custom Profile button . For
more information, see “Working with custom profiles in the Share workspace” on
page 254.
Save and share 247
4In the File name box, type a file name.
5In the File location box, specify the location where you want to save the file.
6Set any of the following options:
• Create Preview Range Only — renders only the section of video that is selected
between the Trim Markers in the Preview panel.
• Enable Smart Render — analyzes a video for any previously rendered sections and
renders only the new or revised sections. This can reduce rendering time significantly.
7Click Start.
Press the [Esc] key to cancel the rendering process.
A progress bar appears when you render a video. You can use the buttons on the
progress bar to do the following:
•Click the Pause/Play button on the progress bar to pause and resume the
rendering process.
• Click the playback button to enable the preview while rendering or stop the preview
to reduce rendering time.
The rendering progress bar
Saving to video files for mobile devices
You can save your movie project to file formats that you can playback on a variety of mobile
devices, such as smartphones, tablets, and game consoles. VideoStudio includes a range of
profiles that optimize your video for specific devices.
To create a video file for a portable device or camcorder
1In the Share workspace, click the Device button .
2Click one of the following buttons to view and choose the profile for your video:
• DV — Convert the project to a DV-compatible video file that can be written back to a
DV camcorder. Connect your camcorder to the computer, turn your camcorder on, and
set it to Play/Edit mode. See your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
• HDV — Convert the project to an HDV-compatible video file that can be written back
to an HDV camcorder. Connect your camcorder to the computer, turn your camcorder
on, and set it to Play/Edit mode. See your camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
• Mobile Device — Creates a high-definition MPEG-4 AVC file that is compatible with
most tablets and smartphones, including iPad, iPhone, and Android devices.
• Game Console — Create MPEG-4 AVC video files that are compatible with PSP devices.
3In the Profile drop-list, choose an option.
248 VideoStudio
4In the File name box, type a file name.
5In the File location box, specify the location where you want to save the file.
6Set any of the following options:
• Create Preview Range Only — renders only the section of video that is selected
between the Trim Markers in the Preview panel.
• Enable Smart Render — analyzes a video for any previously rendered sections and
renders only the new or revised sections. This can reduce rendering time significantly.
7Click Start.
Press the [Esc] key to cancel the rendering process.
You can also write back to a DV camcorder in the Edit workspace by right-clicking a
video clip in the Library and choosing DV Recording.
Saving a track as an alpha channel video
Alpha channel video supports transparency, allowing you to save animated logos, lower-
third graphics, and other objects and animations as video files that you can share and reuse
as overlays in other video projects. For example, if you create a series of videos, you can
overlay the start of each video with an animated title that identifies you or your company as
the creator of the series.
To export a track as an alpha channel video
1In the Share workspace, click the Computer button .
2Click MOV.
3From the Profile drop-list, choose one of the Alpha channel video profiles.
4In the File name box, type a file name.
5In the File location box, specify the location where you want to save the file.
6Set any of the following options:
• Create Preview Range Only — renders only the section of video that is selected
between the Trim Markers in the Preview panel.
• Enable Smart Render — analyzes a video for any previously rendered sections and
renders only the new or revised sections. This can reduce rendering time significantly.
• Enable Hardware Encoder Acceleration — can speed up processing by optimizing
available hardware. Choose an option from the Type drop-list (see other settings in
Preferences > Performance > Hardware acceleration).
7In the Export Track drop-list, choose the track that you want to export.
8Click Start.
Save and share 249
The exported video preserves any transparent areas.
Saving HTML5 video files
If you chose File > New HTML5 project at the start of your project, the HTML5 Files output
option displays in the Share workspace.
HTML5 projects can include hyperlinks and chapters. This video format is compatible with
browsers that support HTML5 technology, including most of the latest browsers and Safari,
which is used on iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch devices.
You can save your HTML5 video projects directly to cloud-based storage services, such as
Dropbox and Google Drive. For more information about sharing from these cloud-based
services, refer to the Dropbox or Google Drive Help.
For more information about starting an HTML5 project, see “Creating new projects” on page
11.
Saving an HTML5 project as an editable VideoStudio project
If you might need to edit the project later and output it to formats other than HTML5, you
can save a copy of the project to the native Corel VideoStudio Pro format (*.vsp).
To create an HTML5 video folder
1In the Share workspace, click the HTML5 Files button .
2Modify any of the following settings:
• WebM — In the Video format area, mark the WebM format check box if you want to
use the WebM format. (Recommended)
• Dimensions — Choose the screen resolution and aspect ratio from the drop-list.
• Flatten audio and background video — In the Dimensions area, mark this check box
if you are not sure if your browser supports more than a single video or audio track.
(Recommended)
3In the Project folder name box, type a name.
4In the File location box, specify the location where you want to save the folder.
If you want to save it to a cloud-based storage service, browse for the local folder of your
preferred service.
5Set any of the following options:
• Create Preview Range Only — renders only the section of video that is selected
between the Trim Markers in the Preview panel.
• Enable Smart Render — analyzes a video for any previously rendered sections and
renders only the new or revised sections. This can reduce rendering time significantly,
but is not available for WebM output.
250 VideoStudio
6Click Start.
You can view the video from your output folder by opening Index.html in your browser.
Press the [Esc] key to cancel the rendering process.
A progress bar appears when you render a video. You can use the buttons on the
progress bar to do the following:
•Click the Pause/Play button on the progress bar to pause and resume the
rendering process.
• Click the playback button to enable the preview while rendering or stop the preview
to reduce rendering time.
The rendering progress bar
To save an HTML5 project as a Corel VideoStudio Pro project (VSP)
1In the Share workspace, click the VideoStudio Project button .
2In the Subject box, type your subject information.
3In the Description box, type a project description.
4From the File format drop-list, choose a VSP version.
5In the File name box, type a file name.
6In the File location box, specify the location where you want to save the project.
7Click Start.
Uploading to the Web
Share your video projects online by uploading your videos to YouTube (in 2D and 3D
formats) and Vimeo. You can access your accounts from within VideoStudio. If you don’t
have an existing account, you will be prompted to create an account.
The first time you log in from VideoStudio, you are asked to authorize the connection
between your online account and VideoStudio. This authorization allows for the exchange of
limited information related to the successful upload of your video.
As with any video upload, the online site usually requires time to post the video after it has
been uploaded.
Please make sure to abide by the terms of use regarding copyright ownership of video
and music as set by YouTube and Vimeo.
Save and share 251
To upload your video to YouTube or Vimeo
1In the Share workspace, click the Web button .
2Click one of the following buttons:
• YouTube
• Vimeo
If you need to sign in, the Log In button appears. Click the button to sign in. If it is the
first time you are signing in, you will be asked to authorize the connection between
VideoStudio and your online account.
3Fill in the necessary information such as your video title, description, privacy settings and
additional tags.
If you want to upload a 3D video to YouTube, enable the Save as 3D video check box
under the Privacy box.
4Enable one of the following options:
• Upload project — you can accept the default settings, or choose a profile from the
drop-list. Type a name in the File name box and choose a File location.
• Upload file — choose a saved video file from the Open Video File dialog box, and
click Open.
5Set any of the following options:
• Create Preview Range Only — renders only the section of video that is selected
between the Trim Markers in the Player panel.
• Enable Smart Render — analyzes a video for any previously rendered sections and
renders only the new or revised sections. This can reduce rendering time significantly.
6Click Start.
A message appears when the upload is complete.
To log in to a different user account, first click the Log Out button that appears below
the YouTube and Vimeo buttons. You can then log in to a different user account.
YouTube currently supports only 3D files in MP4 format, so if you upload a previously
saved 3D video, please ensure that the older file is compatible. Side-by-Side 3D is
recommended.
Creating 3D video files
VideoStudio lets you create 3D video files or convert regular 2D video to 3D video files. It’s
important to refer to the instructions for your 3D playback device so that you know what type
of files and equipment you’ll need for viewing your 3D video. For example, you might require
only generic red and blue glasses (anaglyph) or you might require special polarized glasses
to view a polarized TV screen.
252 VideoStudio
To create 3D video files
1In the Share workspace, click the 3D Movie button .
2Click one of the following buttons:
• MPEG-2
• AVC/H.264
• WMV
• MVC
3In the Profile or Format drop-list, choose an option.
If you want to create a custom profile, click the Create Custom Profile button . For
more information, see “Working with custom profiles in the Share workspace” on
page 254.
4Choose one of the following 3D conversion options:
• Anaglyph — Requires only the red and blue generic anaglyph 3D glasses to view 3D
video without the need for special display monitors.
• Side-by-side — Requires polarized 3D glasses and a compatible polarized display
monitor to view 3D video.
5In the File name box, type a file name.
6In the File location box, specify the location where you want to save the file.
7Set any of the following options:
• Create Preview Range Only — renders only the section of video that is selected
between the Trim Markers in the Player panel.
• Enable Smart Render — analyzes a video for any previously rendered sections and
renders only the new or revised sections. This can reduce rendering time significantly.
8Click Start.
Press the [Esc] key to cancel the rendering process.
A progress bar appears when you render a video. You can use the buttons on the
progress bar to do the following:
•Click the Pause/Play button on the progress bar to pause and resume the
rendering process.
• Click the playback button to enable the preview while rendering or stop the preview
to reduce rendering time.
The rendering progress bar
Save and share 253
Creating video files from part of a project (trimmed)
For any of the sharing categories, you can create a video from part of your project, rather
than the full project, by using the Trim Markers below the Preview window and enabling the
Create Preview Range Only check box.
For more information about using the Player panel, see “Using the Player panel” on page 23.
To create a video file from a trimmed range
1In the Share workspace, click a sharing category, click an output option, and choose your
settings.
2Ensure that the Create Preview Range Only check box is marked.
3In the Player panel, click Project.
4Select a range by dragging the orange Trim Markers to the start and end points you
want.
Only the area between the orange Trim Markers is rendered
5In the bottom-right corner of the Share workspace, click Start.
Creating sound files
VideoStudio lets you create a sound file from an existing video file. This is especially useful
when you want to use the same soundtrack with another set of images, or when you want
to convert the audio from a live performance into sound files. VideoStudio makes it easy for
you to create an audio file of your project in M4A, OGG, WAV or WMA formats.
To create an audio file
1In the Share workspace, click the Computer button , and click Audio.
2From the Format drop-list, select an audio file format.
If you want to adjust the settings for the format, click the Options button and adjust
any of the settings on the Profile or Attributes pages.
3In the File name box, type a file name.
4In the File location box, specify the location where you want to save the file.
5Set any of the following options:
• Create Preview Range Only — renders only the section of video that is selected
between the Trim Markers in the Player panel.
254 VideoStudio
• Enable Smart Render — analyzes a video for any previously rendered sections and
renders only the new or revised sections. This can reduce rendering time significantly.
6Click Start.
Working with custom profiles in the Share workspace
Before you output projects from the Share workspace, you can create and save custom
profiles for most video file formats in the Computer and 3D Movie sharing categories—only
the Audio and Custom output formats do not support custom profiles.
For more information about custom profiles, see “Creating custom profiles” on page 41.
To create a custom profile in the Share workspace
1In the Share workspace, click the Computer button or 3D Movie button .
2Click an output format button.
3From the Profile drop-list, click an existing profile to use as a base for your custom
profile.
4Click the Create custom profile button .
5In the New Profile Options dialog box, click the Corel VideoStudio tab, and type a
name in the Profile name box.
6Click the General tab, and choose the settings you want.
Note: Additional tabs and settings are available depending on the type of format you
choose.
7Click OK.
The custom profile appears in the Profile drop-list.
To edit a custom profile in the Share workspace
1In the Share workspace, select the output format for which you created the profile, and
choose the profile from the Profile drop-list.
2Click the Edit custom profile button .
3In the Edit Profile Options dialog box, change the settings you want and click OK.
To delete a custom profile in the Share workspace
1In the Share workspace, select the output format for which you created the profile, and
choose the profile from the Profile drop-list.
2Click the Delete custom profile button .
Burn discs 255
Burn discs
VideoStudio lets you burn your projects to a DVD, AVCHD, or Blu-ray disc. Alternatively, you
can export your project to an SD card.
This section contains the following topics:
• Saving a project to disc
• Assembling files
• Adding and editing chapters
• Editing a menu template
• Creating advanced menus
• Previewing your movie and menu before burning
• Burning your project onto a disc
• Copying a disc image file
• Creating disc labels
Saving a project to disc
To output your project to a disc
1On the Share workspace, click the Disc button.
2Choose one of the following output formats:
• DVD
• AVCHD
• Blu-ray
• SD Card
A new window appears where you can customize the disc output.
256 VideoStudio
Even if you have not saved your VideoStudio Pro project as a *.vsp file, it can be
brought into the Create Disc dialog box for burning.
Imported videos are automatically adjusted to the correct aspect ratio (as specified in
the Disc Templates Manager dialog box), and are letterboxed or pillarboxed to fit the
correct aspect ratio.
Part Description
1 — Jog Slider Lets you jump to specific scenes.
2 — Mark-in/Mark-out Sets a preview range in the project, or sets the start and end
points for trimming a clip.
3 — Settings and options Lets you access the Preferences dialog box and the Disc
Template Manager.
4 — Project Settings Lets you determine how your movie project is rendered when
you preview it.
5 — Change display aspect
ratio
Lets you select between 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios.
6 — Navigation panel Provides buttons for playback.
7 — Close button Closes the Create Disc dialog box and opens the Save As dialog
box.
8 — Media Clip List Displays the added media clips as thumbnails.
1
7
5
4
6
2
8
3
Burn discs 257
To save a disc output project
1On the disc output window, click the Close button.
The Save As window opens.
2In the File name box, type a file name.
3In the Save in drop-list, select a file location.
4In the Save as type drop-list, select a file format.
You can select a file format that is compatible with earlier versions of VideoStudio.
5Click Save.
Note: A check mark on the disc format button indicates that the disc project has
been saved. Click the previously selected disc format button to continue the disc output
process. You can also edit the disc project at a later time. Click File > Open Project and
select your saved VideoStudio Pro project file (*.vsp).
Assembling files
You can import videos or VideoStudio Pro project files (*.vsp) that you want to include in
your final movie.
To add videos
1Click Add video files. Locate the folder where the videos are stored. Select one or more
video clips.
2Click Open.
Note: After a video clip is added to the Media Clip List, you may see a black thumbnail
that may be caused by a black first frame of the video clip. To change it, click on the
video clip and move the Jog Slider to the scene that you want. Right-click the thumbnail
and choose Change Thumbnail.
To add VideoStudio Pro projects
1Click Add VideoStudio project files. Locate the folder where the projects are stored.
Select one or more video projects you want to add.
2Click Open.
258 VideoStudio
You can also add videos from DVD, AVCHD, and BDMV discs.
You can trim video clips and VideoStudio Pro projects by using the Jog Slider, Mark-in/
out, and navigation controls. Trimming a video gives you the freedom to precisely edit
the video length.
Adding and editing chapters
This feature is available only when the Create menu option is selected. By adding chapters,
you can create submenus linked to their associated video clip. When you add chapter points
to your VideoStudio project, these are automatically converted to disc menu chapters. For
more information, see “Adding cues and chapters” on page 45.
You can create up to 99 chapters for a video clip.
Represented as a video thumbnail in a submenu, each chapter is like a bookmark for a video
clip. When viewers click a chapter, the playback of the video will start from the selected
chapter.
If the Create menu option is not selected, you will be guided to the preview step
immediately without creating any menus after clicking Next.
When you are creating a disc with only one VideoStudio Pro project or one video clip,
do not select Use first clip as introductory video if you want to create menus.
To create or edit chapters linked to a video clip
1Select a video in the Media Clip List.
2Click Add/Edit Chapter.
Burn discs 259
3Drag the Jog Slider to move to a scene that you want to set as a chapter point, and click
Add Chapter. You can also click Auto Add Chapters to let VideoStudio Pro
automatically select chapters.
Note: If you want to use Auto Add Chapters, your video must be at least one minute
long or the video has scene change information.
4Repeat Step 3 to add more chapter points.
5Click OK.
You can also use Remove Chapter or Remove All Chapters to delete unwanted
chapters.
If you click Auto Add Chapters and your video is a DV-formatted AVI file, the program
automatically detects scene changes and add chapters accordingly. For MPEG-2 files,
the program uses the scene change information to automatically generate chapters.
Creating disc menus
Disc menus allow viewers to easily navigate through the contents of a disc and easily choose
the specific parts of the video to watch.
In VideoStudio, you can create disc menus by applying menu templates and editing them to
suit the requirements of your projects.
To apply a menu template
1Select Create menu in the 1 Add Media page and click Next. This takes you to the 2
Menu & Preview page.
2In the Gallery tab, click the menu template thumbnail to apply it.
To apply layout settings to other menu pages
• Click Layout Settings in the Edit tab and select Apply to All Pages of this Menu.
To add background music to menus
1Click the Set the background music button in the Edit tab and choose from a menu
of options for selecting an audio file to be used as background music.
2In the Open Audio File dialog box, choose the audio file to use.
Note: Click the Set audio properties button to adjust the duration of your audio and
apply fade in and out effects.
260 VideoStudio
To add background image or video to menus
1Click the Set the background button in the Edit tab and choose from a menu of
options for selecting an image or a video file to be used as background image or video.
2In the Open Image File or the Open Video File dialog box, choose the image file or the
video to use.
To add motion menus
1Select Motion menu in the Edit tab.
2Adjust the duration of the video thumbnail by setting the number of seconds in
Duration.
Note: Using motion menus increases the file size. Check the disc space usage indicator
and the Required menu space value to make sure that the file size remains within the
limits of your selected output.
Editing a menu template
To edit a menu template, choose options in the Edit tab or click menu objects in the Preview
Window. You can also add new texts, decorations and note menus. Customized templates
can then be saved as new menu templates.
If you are authoring Blu-ray discs, you can create advanced menus that can be used without
interrupting playback. This means that viewers can navigate the contents of your disc while
watching the movie.
To edit text style in menus
1Right-click a text object in the Preview Window and select Font Attributes.
2Modify text attributes in the Font dialog box.
Clicking Font Settings in the Edit tab also opens the Font dialog box.
To resize, rotate, and distort menu objects
• Click the menu object in the Preview Window and drag the handles or nodes.
To revert objects to its previous state, right-click on the Preview Window and select Set
to 0 Degree Angle or Remove Object Distortion
Burn discs 261
To align a single menu object
• Click the menu object in the Preview Window and drag it to the desired position.
To use the grid lines as reference when dragging the menu objects, right-click the
Preview Window and select Show Grid Line. To automatically align your object to the
nearest grid line as you drag it, select Snap to Grid Line.
Make sure that the objects are within the TV safe area (defined by a border with dotted
lines).
To align multiple menu objects
1Select the objects in the Preview Window by pressing [Ctrl].
2Right-click, select Align, and choose from the following options:
• Left/Top/Right/Bottom — Moves all selected objects (except model object)
horizontally to align left/top/right/bottom side with the left/top/right/bottom side of
model object.
• Center Vertically — Moves all selected objects vertically to the center of top/
bottommost objects.
• Center Horizontally — Moves all selected objects horizontally to the center of left/
rightmost objects.
• Center Both — Moves all selected objects to the center of top/bottom/left/rightmost
objects.
• Space Evenly Vertically — Moves all selected objects (except top/bottom most
objects) vertically to even vertical space. This menu item is only available when more
than three objects are selected.
• Space Evenly Horizontally — Moves all selected objects (except left/right most
objects) horizontally to even horizontal space. This menu item is only available when
more than three objects are selected.
• Equal Width/Height — Resizes all selected objects (except model object) to the same
width/height as model object.
• Equal Width and Height — Resizes all selected objects (except model object) to the
same width and height as model object.
To arrange the Z-order of menu objects
• Right-click the menu object in the Preview Window, select Align, and choose from the
following alignment options:
• Bring Forward — Brings selected object one layer forward.
• Send Backward — Sends selected object one layer backward.
262 VideoStudio
• Bring to Front — Brings selected object to front.
• Send to Back — Sends selected object to the layer just above the background object.
To copy and paste shape menu object attributes
• Right-click the menu object in the Preview Window and select Copy Shape Attributes or
Paste Shape Attributes.
Note: You can copy and paste attributes such as width, height, rotation degree,
distortion, transparency, shadows and highlights. Text boundary, however, cannot be
copied.
To add menu filters and transition effects
1Click a menu object in the Preview Window.
2Choose the filter or effects to apply in the Edit tab.
• Moving Path — Applies a predefined motion path to menu objects such as titles,
thumbnail buttons, and navigation buttons.
• Menu In/Menu Out — Opens selection filters and transition effects. If a menu
template has a Menu In effect, its default duration is 20 seconds.
Some template menus have sound effects for Menu In and Menu Out transitions.
These sound effects, however, cannot be modified nor deleted.
Creating advanced menus
Advanced menu templates are made up of three separate layers for background settings,
title menus, and chapter menus. You can edit menu objects in the currently selected layer.
The illustration below shows the structure of a disc menu.
In this example, Clip 1 has three chapters, so when you click the Clip 1 video thumbnail, it
jumps to submenu #1. If you look at Clip 2, it has no chapters assigned to it, so when you
click Clip 2, the video starts playing from the beginning.
Clip 1
Main menu
Submenu #1
Clip 2
Burn discs 263
To add a title menu
• Click Advanced Settings in the Edit tab and select Add Title Menu.
To add chapter menus
• Click Advanced Settings in the Edit tab and select Create Chapter Menu.
To show the menu thumbnail numbers
• Click Advanced Settings in the Edit tab and select Show Thumbnail Number.
To create a menu template:
1Click Customize in the Edit tab of the 2 Menu & Preview page. The Customize Menu
dialog box appears.
2Choose from the following options:
• Set the background music — Lets you choose an audio file to be used as background
music.
• Set the background — Lets you choose an image or a video file to be used as
background image or video.
• Font Settings — Lets you apply text attributes.
• Pan & Zoom — Lets you apply pan and zoom effects.
• Motion Filter — Lets you apply motion effects.
• Menu In/Menu Out — Lets you apply menu motion effects.
3In the drop down menu, select Frame, Navigation Button, or Layout to display the
associated preset thumbnails. Double-click a thumbnail to apply it.
Note: You can also resize, distort, rotate, and move menu objects in the Preview
Window.
4Click Add to Menu Template to add the template to the Favorites folder.
Note: When working in the Customize Menu dialog box, use the Font dialog box to
accurately resize text. The Font dialog box can also be launched by right-clicking the text
and selecting Font Attributes.
Previewing your movie and menu before burning
Now, it's time to see how your movie looks before you burn it onto a disc. Simply move the
mouse and click Play to watch your movie and test the menu on your computer. Use the
navigation controls here as you would on a standard remote control of a standalone disc
player.
264 VideoStudio
Burning your project onto a disc
This is the final step in the disc creation process. You can burn your movie to a disc, save it
to a folder on your hard drive, or create a disc image file so that you can burn the movie at
a later time.
Burning options
•Disc burner — Specifies the settings for your burning device.
•Label — Enables you to enter a volume name for the Blu-ray Disc/DVD. The label can
contain a maximum of 32 characters.
•Drive — Selects the disc burner that you want to use to burn the video file.
•Copies — Sets the number of disc copies to burn.
•Disc type — Displays the output disc format for the current project.
•Create to disc — Allows you to directly burn your video project onto a disc.
•Recording format — Select DVD-Video format to use the DVD industry standard. To
quickly re-edit your disc without copying the file to the hard drive, select DVD-Video
Burn discs 265
(fast re-editable) which still complies with the industry standard and has very high
compatibility when working with set-top home DVD players and computer DVD-ROM.
•Create DVD folders — This option is only enabled when the video file being created is a
DVD-Video. The files created are in preparation for burning the video file to an AVCHD
or Blu-ray Disc. This also allows the user to view the finished disc folders on the
computer using a disc playback software like Corel® WinDVD®.
•Create disc image — Select this option if you plan to burn the video disc several times.
By selecting this option, you don't have to generate the file again when you want to burn
the same video disc. This option is only available for DVD-Video and disabled for
AVCHD, and Blu-ray Disc projects.
•Normalize audio — Different video clips may have different audio recording levels when
created. When these video clips are put together, the volume may vary greatly. To make
volume levels consistent between clips, the Normalize audio function evaluates and
adjusts the audio waveform of the whole project to ensure a balanced audio level
throughout the video.
•Erase — Deletes all the data on a rewritable disc.
•Burning Options — Adjusts the advanced output settings for burning your project.
•Delete temp files — Removes all unnecessary files in your working folder.
•Burn — Begins the recording process.
•Required space — Serves as a reference when you burn your projects. These indicators
help determine if you have sufficient space to successfully burn your project onto the
disc.
•Required/Available hard disk space — Displays the space needed by the project and
the available hard drive space.
•Required/Available disc space — Displays the space needed to fit the video file on the
disc and the space that is available for use.
To burn your movie onto a disc
1Click Next after you preview your project.
2Click Show more output options and enable one or more of the following options:
• Create DVD folders — Creates DVD folders in a specified location.
• Create disc image — Creates an ISO image file of the DVD.
• Normalize audio — Evens out irregular audio levels during playback.
Note: Create disc image is disabled for AVCHD and Blu-ray Disc projects.
3Click More settings for burning.
The Burning Options dialog box appears. Define additional burner and output settings
and click OK.
4Click Burn to start the burning process.
266 VideoStudio
Click OK when prompted that the task is done.
5Click Close to save your work automatically and return to the VideoStudio Editor.
Copying a disc image file
A disc image file is a single file that has captured the entire contents and file structure of a
disc. Creating a disc image file on your computer allows you to archive the source disc
contents for backup or future burning. You will need sufficient space on your computer to
store the disc image file.
To copy a disc image file:
1Insert a blank disc into your disc burner.
2Click Tools > Burn from Disc Image (ISO).
The disc copying dialog box is displayed.
3In Source disc image file, browse and select your source disc image (*.iso) file.
4Choose your burner drive in Destination.
5Click Copy to start copying.
Click to set burning preferences.
Creating disc labels
Create and print disc labels, case covers, and inserts in VideoStudio. You can add and edit
images, texts, and icons to complete your layout.
To launch the disc label creation dialog box
• Click the Print disc label icon at the lower left part of the Create disc dialog box.
Burn discs 267
General tab
The General tab allows you to select a disc label or disc cover template to start with. You can
then customize the overall design of the disc label, disc cover, insert, or booklet. The actual
dimensions of your media or label in relation to the selected paper size is displayed to serve
as your guide.
Image tab
The Image tab allows you to adjust the properties of your images.
Text tab
The Text tab allows you to format and adjust the properties of your texts.
Disc label creation options
You can do any of the following tasks when designing a disc label.
•Files
•Load Disc Label — Opens a previously saved disc label project.
•Save Disc Label — Saves a disc label project.
•Add Image — Selects an image to add on the label.
•Add Text — Adds a text object to the label.
•Add Icon — Adds an icon to the label.
•Playlist — Opens the Add/Edit Playlist Information dialog box to allow you to add
information on the label such as the album title, artist name, as well as date.
•Clear content — Removes all objects and background from the disc layout. This is useful
when starting over with your design.
Other options
•Show/Hide Disc — Shows/hides the outline of the disc for better alignment of images
or text.
•Show/Hide Grid — Shows/hides gridlines for laying out images and text symmetrically.
268 VideoStudio
Shortcuts 269
Shortcuts
This section contains the following topics:
• Menu command shortcuts
•Workspace shortcuts
• Navigation area shortcuts
• Timeline shortcuts
• Multi-trim Video shortcuts
• Layout settings shortcuts
• Screen capture shortcuts
•Other Shortcuts
Menu command shortcuts
Workspace shortcuts
Ctrl + N Create a new project
Ctrl + M Create a new HTML5 project
Ctrl + O Open a project
Ctrl + S Save a project
Alt + Enter Project Properties
F6 Preferences
Ctrl + Z Undo
Ctrl + Y Redo
Ctrl + C Copy
Ctrl + V Paste
Del Delete
F1 Help
Alt + F10 Go to Capture workspace
Alt + F11 Go to Edit workspace
Alt + F12 Go to Share workspace
270 VideoStudio
Navigation area shortcuts
Timeline shortcuts
F3 Set mark-in
F4 Set mark-out
LPlay/Pause
Ctrl + P Play/Pause
Space Play/Pause
Shift + Play button Play the currently selected clip
K Return to the start of clip or project
Home Return to the start of clip or project
Ctrl + H Return to the start of clip
End Move to the end segment or cue
Ctrl + E End
DPrevious frame
F Next frame
Ctrl + R Repeat
Ctrl + L System Volume
S Split Video
Tab Toggle between the Trim Handles and
Scrubber.
Enter When the left Trim Handle is active, pressing
[Tab] or [Enter] switches to the right handle.
Left If you pressed [Tab] or [Enter] to make the
Trim Handles or Scrubber active, use the Left-
arrow key to move to the previous frame.
Right If you pressed [Tab] or [Enter] to make the
Trim Handles or Scrubber active, use the
Right-arrow key to move to the next frame.
ESC If you pressed [Tab] or [Enter] to activate and
toggle between the Trim Handles and
Scrubber, you can press [Esc] to deactivate
the Trim Handles / Scrubber.
Ctrl + A Select all clips on the Timeline.
Single title: Select all characters in the on-
screen edit mode.
Alt + left arrow key/right arrow key Moves the selected clip along the Timeline by
one frame at a time.
Shortcuts 271
Multi-trim Video shortcuts
Layout settings shortcuts
Screen capture shortcuts
Ctrl + X Single title: Cut selected characters in the on-
screen edit mode.
Shift + Click Select multiple clips in the same track. (To
select multiple clips in the Library, [Shift] +
[Click] or [Ctrl] + [Click] the clips.)
Left Select the previous clip on the Timeline.
Right Select the next clip on the Timeline.
+ / - Zoom in/out.
Ctrl + Right Scroll forward.
Ctrl + Left Scroll backward.
Ctrl + Up /
Page Up
Scroll up.
Home Move to the start of the Timeline.
End Move to the end of the Timeline.
Ctrl + H The previous segment.
Ctrl + E The next segment.
Del Delete
F3 Set mark-in
F4 Set mark-out
F5 Go to start of clip
F6 Go to end of clip
Esc Cancel
F7 Switch to Default
Ctrl + 1 Switch to Custom #1
Ctrl + 2 Switch to Custom #2
Ctrl + 3 Switch to Custom #3
Alt + 1 Save to Custom #1
Alt + 2 Save to Custom #2
Alt + 3 Save to Custom #3
F10 Stop screen capture
272 VideoStudio
Other Shortcuts
F11 Pause / Resume screen capture
ESC Stop capturing, recording, rendering, or close
a dialog box without making any changes.
If you switched to Full Screen Preview, press
[Esc] to return to the VideoStudio workspace.
DV-to-DVD Wizard 273
DV-to-DVD Wizard
Using the DV-to-DVD Wizard, you can capture video from FireWire-enabled DV and HDV
tape camcorders, add a theme template, and then burn to DVD. This video-editing mode
provides a fast and direct way to transfer your videos to a DVD.
You can launch the DV-to-DVD Wizard by clicking Tools > DV-to-DVD Wizard.
This section contains the following topics:
• Scanning for scenes
• Applying templates and burning to DVDs
Scanning for scenes
Scan the DV tape and select the scenes that you want to add to your movie.
To scan for scenes
1Connect your camcorder to your computer, and turn on the device. Set your camcorder
to Play (or VTR/VCR) mode.
2Select a recording device under Device.
3Click the Capture format arrow to select a file format for captured videos.
4Specify whether to burn all videos of the tape (Burn whole tape) or scan your DV tape
(Scene detection).
To burn the whole tape
1Select Burn whole tape and then specify the tape duration under Duration.
2Click Next to apply the template and burn to DVD.
To use scene detection
1After selecting Scene detection, choose whether to scan the tape from the Beginning or
Current position.
• Beginning — Scans the tape for scenes from the beginning. The tape will automatically
be rewound if the tape position is not in the beginning.
274 VideoStudio
• Current position — Scans the tape for scenes from the current tape position.
2Specify the scan speed and click Start Scan to begin scanning the DV device for scenes.
Scenes are video segments that are distinguished by date and time stamps on the DV
tape.
DV-to-DVD Wizard
3In the Storyboard View, select each scene that you want to include in your movie, and
click Mark Scene.
4Click Next.
Note: To save and import the scanned file without having to re-scan it, click the Options
button and select Save DV Quick Scan Digest. To manage a large number of tapes,
click Save DV Quick Scan Digest as HTML. This feature lets you print the HTML file and
attach it with your tapes.
Applying templates and burning to DVDs
Choose a style template, specify settings, and burn your movies to DVD.
To apply a style template and burn to DVD
1Specify a volume name and recording format for your movie.
Note: If you have more than one burner installed on your computer, or if the default
drive is not a burner, specify the burner that you want to use in the Advanced Settings
dialog box.
DV-to-DVD Wizard 275
2Choose a style template from one of the available presets to apply to your movie, and
then select the output video quality.
3To customize the theme template text, click Edit Title.
4In the Begin tab of the Edit Template Title dialog box, double-click the text that you
want to modify. You can also modify attributes such as font, color or shadow settings.
5Click the End tab to modify the text. Click OK.
6To mark your video clips with date information, click Add as title in Video date
information. Select Entire video if you want the video to appear from beginning to end,
or specify the duration.
7Click the Burn button to burn your movie file to a disc.
Note: If the movie is too big to fit onto a DVD, click Fit & Burn.
276 VideoStudio
Legal Notice
Corel® VideoStudio® 2021 User Guide
© 2021 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Corel, the Corel logo, ClearSlide, CorelDRAW, FastFlick, MindManager, Parallels, PaintShop,
PaintShop Pro, VideoStudio, and WinZip are trademarks or registered trademarks of Corel
Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the U.S., and/or other countries. Other
product, font, and company names and logos may be trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies.
INFORMATION PROVIDED HEREIN BY COREL IS PROVIDED "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABLE, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR THOSE ARISING BY LAW, STATUTE, USAGE OF TRADE, COURSE
OF DEALING OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS OF THE INFORMATION
PROVIDED OR ITS USE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. COREL SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY TO YOU OR
ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOST OR DAMAGED DATA OR OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC
LOSS, EVEN IF COREL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR
THEY ARE FORESEEABLE. COREL IS ALSO NOT LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIMS MADE BY ANY
THIRD PARTY COREL'S MAXIMUM AGGREGATE LIABILITY TO YOU SHALL NOT EXCEED THE
COSTS PAID BY YOU TO PURCHASE THE MATERIALS. SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
